]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispref/display.texi
Some corrections in Elisp manual
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispref / display.texi
1 @c -*- mode: texinfo; coding: utf-8 -*-
2 @c This is part of the GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.
3 @c Copyright (C) 1990-1995, 1998-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @c See the file elisp.texi for copying conditions.
5 @node Display
6 @chapter Emacs Display
7
8 This chapter describes a number of features related to the display
9 that Emacs presents to the user.
10
11 @menu
12 * Refresh Screen:: Clearing the screen and redrawing everything on it.
13 * Forcing Redisplay:: Forcing redisplay.
14 * Truncation:: Folding or wrapping long text lines.
15 * The Echo Area:: Displaying messages at the bottom of the screen.
16 * Warnings:: Displaying warning messages for the user.
17 * Invisible Text:: Hiding part of the buffer text.
18 * Selective Display:: Hiding part of the buffer text (the old way).
19 * Temporary Displays:: Displays that go away automatically.
20 * Overlays:: Use overlays to highlight parts of the buffer.
21 * Size of Displayed Text:: How large displayed text is.
22 * Line Height:: Controlling the height of lines.
23 * Faces:: A face defines a graphics style for text characters:
24 font, colors, etc.
25 * Fringes:: Controlling window fringes.
26 * Scroll Bars:: Controlling scroll bars.
27 * Window Dividers:: Separating windows visually.
28 * Display Property:: Enabling special display features.
29 * Images:: Displaying images in Emacs buffers.
30 * Xwidgets:: Displaying native widgets in Emacs buffers.
31 * Buttons:: Adding clickable buttons to Emacs buffers.
32 * Abstract Display:: Emacs's Widget for Object Collections.
33 * Blinking:: How Emacs shows the matching open parenthesis.
34 * Character Display:: How Emacs displays individual characters.
35 * Beeping:: Audible signal to the user.
36 * Window Systems:: Which window system is being used.
37 * Bidirectional Display:: Display of bidirectional scripts, such as
38 Arabic and Farsi.
39 @end menu
40
41 @node Refresh Screen
42 @section Refreshing the Screen
43 @cindex refresh the screen
44 @cindex screen refresh
45
46 The function @code{redraw-frame} clears and redisplays the entire
47 contents of a given frame (@pxref{Frames}). This is useful if the
48 screen is corrupted.
49
50 @defun redraw-frame &optional frame
51 This function clears and redisplays frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame}
52 is omitted or nil, it redraws the selected frame.
53 @end defun
54
55 Even more powerful is @code{redraw-display}:
56
57 @deffn Command redraw-display
58 This function clears and redisplays all visible frames.
59 @end deffn
60
61 In Emacs, processing user input takes priority over redisplay. If
62 you call these functions when input is available, they don't redisplay
63 immediately, but the requested redisplay does happen
64 eventually---after all the input has been processed.
65
66 On text terminals, suspending and resuming Emacs normally also
67 refreshes the screen. Some terminal emulators record separate
68 contents for display-oriented programs such as Emacs and for ordinary
69 sequential display. If you are using such a terminal, you might want
70 to inhibit the redisplay on resumption.
71
72 @defopt no-redraw-on-reenter
73 @cindex suspend (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
74 @cindex resume (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
75 This variable controls whether Emacs redraws the entire screen after it
76 has been suspended and resumed. Non-@code{nil} means there is no need
77 to redraw, @code{nil} means redrawing is needed. The default is @code{nil}.
78 @end defopt
79
80 @node Forcing Redisplay
81 @section Forcing Redisplay
82 @cindex forcing redisplay
83
84 Emacs normally tries to redisplay the screen whenever it waits for
85 input. With the following function, you can request an immediate
86 attempt to redisplay, in the middle of Lisp code, without actually
87 waiting for input.
88
89 @defun redisplay &optional force
90 This function tries immediately to redisplay. The optional argument
91 @var{force}, if non-@code{nil}, forces the redisplay to be performed,
92 instead of being preempted if input is pending.
93
94 The function returns @code{t} if it actually tried to redisplay, and
95 @code{nil} otherwise. A value of @code{t} does not mean that
96 redisplay proceeded to completion; it could have been preempted by
97 newly arriving input.
98 @end defun
99
100 Although @code{redisplay} tries immediately to redisplay, it does
101 not change how Emacs decides which parts of its frame(s) to redisplay.
102 By contrast, the following function adds certain windows to the
103 pending redisplay work (as if their contents had completely changed),
104 but does not immediately try to perform redisplay.
105
106 @defun force-window-update &optional object
107 This function forces some or all windows to be updated the next time
108 Emacs does a redisplay. If @var{object} is a window, that window is
109 to be updated. If @var{object} is a buffer or buffer name, all
110 windows displaying that buffer are to be updated. If @var{object} is
111 @code{nil} (or omitted), all windows are to be updated.
112
113 This function does not do a redisplay immediately; Emacs does that as
114 it waits for input, or when the function @code{redisplay} is called.
115 @end defun
116
117 @defvar pre-redisplay-function
118 A function run just before redisplay. It is called with one argument,
119 the set of windows to be redisplayed. The set can be @code{nil},
120 meaning only the selected window, or @code{t}, meaning all the
121 windows.
122 @end defvar
123
124 @defvar pre-redisplay-functions
125 This hook is run just before redisplay. It is called once in each
126 window that is about to be redisplayed, with @code{current-buffer} set
127 to the buffer displayed in that window.
128 @end defvar
129
130 @node Truncation
131 @section Truncation
132 @cindex line wrapping
133 @cindex line truncation
134 @cindex continuation lines
135 @cindex @samp{$} in display
136 @cindex @samp{\} in display
137
138 When a line of text extends beyond the right edge of a window, Emacs
139 can @dfn{continue} the line (make it wrap to the next screen
140 line), or @dfn{truncate} the line (limit it to one screen line). The
141 additional screen lines used to display a long text line are called
142 @dfn{continuation} lines. Continuation is not the same as filling;
143 continuation happens on the screen only, not in the buffer contents,
144 and it breaks a line precisely at the right margin, not at a word
145 boundary. @xref{Filling}.
146
147 On a graphical display, tiny arrow images in the window fringes
148 indicate truncated and continued lines (@pxref{Fringes}). On a text
149 terminal, a @samp{$} in the rightmost column of the window indicates
150 truncation; a @samp{\} on the rightmost column indicates a line that
151 wraps. (The display table can specify alternate characters to use
152 for this; @pxref{Display Tables}).
153
154 @defopt truncate-lines
155 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, lines that extend
156 beyond the right edge of the window are truncated; otherwise, they are
157 continued. As a special exception, the variable
158 @code{truncate-partial-width-windows} takes precedence in
159 @dfn{partial-width} windows (i.e., windows that do not occupy the
160 entire frame width).
161 @end defopt
162
163 @defopt truncate-partial-width-windows
164 @cindex partial-width windows
165 This variable controls line truncation in @dfn{partial-width} windows.
166 A partial-width window is one that does not occupy the entire frame
167 width (@pxref{Splitting Windows}). If the value is @code{nil}, line
168 truncation is determined by the variable @code{truncate-lines} (see
169 above). If the value is an integer @var{n}, lines are truncated if
170 the partial-width window has fewer than @var{n} columns, regardless of
171 the value of @code{truncate-lines}; if the partial-width window has
172 @var{n} or more columns, line truncation is determined by
173 @code{truncate-lines}. For any other non-@code{nil} value, lines are
174 truncated in every partial-width window, regardless of the value of
175 @code{truncate-lines}.
176 @end defopt
177
178 When horizontal scrolling (@pxref{Horizontal Scrolling}) is in use in
179 a window, that forces truncation.
180
181 @defvar wrap-prefix
182 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
183 @dfn{wrap prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
184 continuation line. (If lines are truncated, @code{wrap-prefix} is
185 never used.) Its value may be a string or an image (@pxref{Other
186 Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as specified by the
187 @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties (@pxref{Specified
188 Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way as a @code{display}
189 text property. @xref{Display Property}.
190
191 A wrap prefix may also be specified for regions of text, using the
192 @code{wrap-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
193 over the @code{wrap-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
194 @end defvar
195
196 @defvar line-prefix
197 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
198 @dfn{line prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
199 non-continuation line. Its value may be a string or an image
200 (@pxref{Other Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as
201 specified by the @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties
202 (@pxref{Specified Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way
203 as a @code{display} text property. @xref{Display Property}.
204
205 A line prefix may also be specified for regions of text using the
206 @code{line-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
207 over the @code{line-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
208 @end defvar
209
210 @ignore
211 If your buffer contains only very short lines, you might find it
212 advisable to set @code{cache-long-scans} to @code{nil}.
213
214 @defvar cache-long-scans
215 If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default), various indentation
216 and motion functions, and Emacs redisplay, cache the results of
217 scanning the buffer, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning regions
218 of the buffer unless they are modified.
219
220 Turning off the cache speeds up processing of short lines somewhat.
221
222 This variable is automatically buffer-local in every buffer.
223 @end defvar
224 @end ignore
225
226 @node The Echo Area
227 @section The Echo Area
228 @cindex error display
229 @cindex echo area
230
231 @c FIXME: Why not use @xref{Minibuffers} directly? --xfq
232 The @dfn{echo area} is used for displaying error messages
233 (@pxref{Errors}), for messages made with the @code{message} primitive,
234 and for echoing keystrokes. It is not the same as the minibuffer,
235 despite the fact that the minibuffer appears (when active) in the same
236 place on the screen as the echo area. @xref{Minibuffer,, The
237 Minibuffer, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
238
239 Apart from the functions documented in this section, you can print
240 Lisp objects to the echo area by specifying @code{t} as the output
241 stream. @xref{Output Streams}.
242
243 @menu
244 * Displaying Messages:: Explicitly displaying text in the echo area.
245 * Progress:: Informing user about progress of a long operation.
246 * Logging Messages:: Echo area messages are logged for the user.
247 * Echo Area Customization:: Controlling the echo area.
248 @end menu
249
250 @node Displaying Messages
251 @subsection Displaying Messages in the Echo Area
252 @cindex display message in echo area
253
254 This section describes the standard functions for displaying
255 messages in the echo area.
256
257 @defun message format-string &rest arguments
258 This function displays a message in the echo area.
259 @var{format-string} is a format string, and @var{arguments} are the
260 objects for its format specifications, like in the @code{format-message}
261 function (@pxref{Formatting Strings}). The resulting formatted string
262 is displayed in the echo area; if it contains @code{face} text
263 properties, it is displayed with the specified faces (@pxref{Faces}).
264 The string is also added to the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but without
265 text properties (@pxref{Logging Messages}).
266
267 In a format string containing single quotes, curved quotes @t{‘like
268 this’} and grave quotes @t{`like this'} work better than straight
269 quotes @t{'like this'}, as @code{message} typically formats every
270 straight quote as a curved closing quote.
271
272 In batch mode, the message is printed to the standard error stream,
273 followed by a newline.
274
275 When @code{inhibit-message} is non-@code{nil}, no message will be displayed
276 in the echo area, it will only be logged to @samp{*Messages*}.
277
278 If @var{format-string} is @code{nil} or the empty string,
279 @code{message} clears the echo area; if the echo area has been
280 expanded automatically, this brings it back to its normal size. If
281 the minibuffer is active, this brings the minibuffer contents back
282 onto the screen immediately.
283
284 @example
285 @group
286 (message "Reverting `%s'..." (buffer-name))
287 @print{} Reverting ‘subr.el’...
288 @result{} "Reverting ‘subr.el’..."
289 @end group
290
291 @group
292 ---------- Echo Area ----------
293 Reverting ‘subr.el’...
294 ---------- Echo Area ----------
295 @end group
296 @end example
297
298 To automatically display a message in the echo area or in a pop-buffer,
299 depending on its size, use @code{display-message-or-buffer} (see below).
300
301 @strong{Warning:} If you want to use your own string as a message
302 verbatim, don't just write @code{(message @var{string})}. If
303 @var{string} contains @samp{%}, @samp{`}, or @samp{'} it may be
304 reformatted, with undesirable results. Instead, use @code{(message
305 "%s" @var{string})}.
306 @end defun
307
308 @defvar inhibit-message
309 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{message} and related functions
310 will not use the Echo Area to display messages.
311 @end defvar
312
313 @defmac with-temp-message message &rest body
314 This construct displays a message in the echo area temporarily, during
315 the execution of @var{body}. It displays @var{message}, executes
316 @var{body}, then returns the value of the last body form while restoring
317 the previous echo area contents.
318 @end defmac
319
320 @defun message-or-box format-string &rest arguments
321 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but may display it
322 in a dialog box instead of the echo area. If this function is called in
323 a command that was invoked using the mouse---more precisely, if
324 @code{last-nonmenu-event} (@pxref{Command Loop Info}) is either
325 @code{nil} or a list---then it uses a dialog box or pop-up menu to
326 display the message. Otherwise, it uses the echo area. (This is the
327 same criterion that @code{y-or-n-p} uses to make a similar decision; see
328 @ref{Yes-or-No Queries}.)
329
330 You can force use of the mouse or of the echo area by binding
331 @code{last-nonmenu-event} to a suitable value around the call.
332 @end defun
333
334 @defun message-box format-string &rest arguments
335 @anchor{message-box}
336 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but uses a dialog
337 box (or a pop-up menu) whenever that is possible. If it is impossible
338 to use a dialog box or pop-up menu, because the terminal does not
339 support them, then @code{message-box} uses the echo area, like
340 @code{message}.
341 @end defun
342
343 @defun display-message-or-buffer message &optional buffer-name action frame
344 This function displays the message @var{message}, which may be either a
345 string or a buffer. If it is shorter than the maximum height of the
346 echo area, as defined by @code{max-mini-window-height}, it is displayed
347 in the echo area, using @code{message}. Otherwise,
348 @code{display-buffer} is used to show it in a pop-up buffer.
349
350 Returns either the string shown in the echo area, or when a pop-up
351 buffer is used, the window used to display it.
352
353 If @var{message} is a string, then the optional argument
354 @var{buffer-name} is the name of the buffer used to display it when a
355 pop-up buffer is used, defaulting to @file{*Message*}. In the case
356 where @var{message} is a string and displayed in the echo area, it is
357 not specified whether the contents are inserted into the buffer anyway.
358
359 The optional arguments @var{action} and @var{frame} are as for
360 @code{display-buffer}, and only used if a buffer is displayed.
361 @end defun
362
363 @defun current-message
364 This function returns the message currently being displayed in the
365 echo area, or @code{nil} if there is none.
366 @end defun
367
368 @node Progress
369 @subsection Reporting Operation Progress
370 @cindex progress reporting
371
372 When an operation can take a while to finish, you should inform the
373 user about the progress it makes. This way the user can estimate
374 remaining time and clearly see that Emacs is busy working, not hung.
375 A convenient way to do this is to use a @dfn{progress reporter}.
376
377 Here is a working example that does nothing useful:
378
379 @smallexample
380 (let ((progress-reporter
381 (make-progress-reporter "Collecting mana for Emacs..."
382 0 500)))
383 (dotimes (k 500)
384 (sit-for 0.01)
385 (progress-reporter-update progress-reporter k))
386 (progress-reporter-done progress-reporter))
387 @end smallexample
388
389 @defun make-progress-reporter message &optional min-value max-value current-value min-change min-time
390 This function creates and returns a progress reporter object, which
391 you will use as an argument for the other functions listed below. The
392 idea is to precompute as much data as possible to make progress
393 reporting very fast.
394
395 When this progress reporter is subsequently used, it will display
396 @var{message} in the echo area, followed by progress percentage.
397 @var{message} is treated as a simple string. If you need it to depend
398 on a filename, for instance, use @code{format-message} before calling this
399 function.
400
401 The arguments @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} should be numbers
402 standing for the starting and final states of the operation. For
403 instance, an operation that scans a buffer should set these to the
404 results of @code{point-min} and @code{point-max} correspondingly.
405 @var{max-value} should be greater than @var{min-value}.
406
407 Alternatively, you can set @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} to
408 @code{nil}. In that case, the progress reporter does not report
409 process percentages; it instead displays a ``spinner'' that rotates a
410 notch each time you update the progress reporter.
411
412 If @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} are numbers, you can give the
413 argument @var{current-value} a numerical value specifying the initial
414 progress; if omitted, this defaults to @var{min-value}.
415
416 The remaining arguments control the rate of echo area updates. The
417 progress reporter will wait for at least @var{min-change} more
418 percents of the operation to be completed before printing next
419 message; the default is one percent. @var{min-time} specifies the
420 minimum time in seconds to pass between successive prints; the default
421 is 0.2 seconds. (On some operating systems, the progress reporter may
422 handle fractions of seconds with varying precision).
423
424 This function calls @code{progress-reporter-update}, so the first
425 message is printed immediately.
426 @end defun
427
428 @defun progress-reporter-update reporter &optional value
429 This function does the main work of reporting progress of your
430 operation. It displays the message of @var{reporter}, followed by
431 progress percentage determined by @var{value}. If percentage is zero,
432 or close enough according to the @var{min-change} and @var{min-time}
433 arguments, then it is omitted from the output.
434
435 @var{reporter} must be the result of a call to
436 @code{make-progress-reporter}. @var{value} specifies the current
437 state of your operation and must be between @var{min-value} and
438 @var{max-value} (inclusive) as passed to
439 @code{make-progress-reporter}. For instance, if you scan a buffer,
440 then @var{value} should be the result of a call to @code{point}.
441
442 This function respects @var{min-change} and @var{min-time} as passed
443 to @code{make-progress-reporter} and so does not output new messages
444 on every invocation. It is thus very fast and normally you should not
445 try to reduce the number of calls to it: resulting overhead will most
446 likely negate your effort.
447 @end defun
448
449 @defun progress-reporter-force-update reporter &optional value new-message
450 This function is similar to @code{progress-reporter-update} except
451 that it prints a message in the echo area unconditionally.
452
453 The first two arguments have the same meaning as for
454 @code{progress-reporter-update}. Optional @var{new-message} allows
455 you to change the message of the @var{reporter}. Since this function
456 always updates the echo area, such a change will be immediately
457 presented to the user.
458 @end defun
459
460 @defun progress-reporter-done reporter
461 This function should be called when the operation is finished. It
462 prints the message of @var{reporter} followed by word @samp{done} in the
463 echo area.
464
465 You should always call this function and not hope for
466 @code{progress-reporter-update} to print @samp{100%}. Firstly, it may
467 never print it, there are many good reasons for this not to happen.
468 Secondly, @samp{done} is more explicit.
469 @end defun
470
471 @defmac dotimes-with-progress-reporter (var count [result]) message body@dots{}
472 This is a convenience macro that works the same way as @code{dotimes}
473 does, but also reports loop progress using the functions described
474 above. It allows you to save some typing.
475
476 You can rewrite the example in the beginning of this node using
477 this macro this way:
478
479 @example
480 (dotimes-with-progress-reporter
481 (k 500)
482 "Collecting some mana for Emacs..."
483 (sit-for 0.01))
484 @end example
485 @end defmac
486
487 @node Logging Messages
488 @subsection Logging Messages in @file{*Messages*}
489 @cindex logging echo-area messages
490
491 Almost all the messages displayed in the echo area are also recorded
492 in the @file{*Messages*} buffer so that the user can refer back to
493 them. This includes all the messages that are output with
494 @code{message}. By default, this buffer is read-only and uses the major
495 mode @code{messages-buffer-mode}. Nothing prevents the user from
496 killing the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but the next display of a message
497 recreates it. Any Lisp code that needs to access the
498 @file{*Messages*} buffer directly and wants to ensure that it exists
499 should use the function @code{messages-buffer}.
500
501 @defun messages-buffer
502 This function returns the @file{*Messages*} buffer. If it does not
503 exist, it creates it, and switches it to @code{messages-buffer-mode}.
504 @end defun
505
506 @defopt message-log-max
507 This variable specifies how many lines to keep in the @file{*Messages*}
508 buffer. The value @code{t} means there is no limit on how many lines to
509 keep. The value @code{nil} disables message logging entirely. Here's
510 how to display a message and prevent it from being logged:
511
512 @example
513 (let (message-log-max)
514 (message @dots{}))
515 @end example
516 @end defopt
517
518 To make @file{*Messages*} more convenient for the user, the logging
519 facility combines successive identical messages. It also combines
520 successive related messages for the sake of two cases: question
521 followed by answer, and a series of progress messages.
522
523 A question followed by an answer has two messages like the
524 ones produced by @code{y-or-n-p}: the first is @samp{@var{question}},
525 and the second is @samp{@var{question}...@var{answer}}. The first
526 message conveys no additional information beyond what's in the second,
527 so logging the second message discards the first from the log.
528
529 A series of progress messages has successive messages like
530 those produced by @code{make-progress-reporter}. They have the form
531 @samp{@var{base}...@var{how-far}}, where @var{base} is the same each
532 time, while @var{how-far} varies. Logging each message in the series
533 discards the previous one, provided they are consecutive.
534
535 The functions @code{make-progress-reporter} and @code{y-or-n-p}
536 don't have to do anything special to activate the message log
537 combination feature. It operates whenever two consecutive messages
538 are logged that share a common prefix ending in @samp{...}.
539
540 @node Echo Area Customization
541 @subsection Echo Area Customization
542 @cindex echo area customization
543
544 These variables control details of how the echo area works.
545
546 @defvar cursor-in-echo-area
547 This variable controls where the cursor appears when a message is
548 displayed in the echo area. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the cursor
549 appears at the end of the message. Otherwise, the cursor appears at
550 point---not in the echo area at all.
551
552 The value is normally @code{nil}; Lisp programs bind it to @code{t}
553 for brief periods of time.
554 @end defvar
555
556 @defvar echo-area-clear-hook
557 This normal hook is run whenever the echo area is cleared---either by
558 @code{(message nil)} or for any other reason.
559 @end defvar
560
561 @defopt echo-keystrokes
562 This variable determines how much time should elapse before command
563 characters echo. Its value must be a number, and specifies the
564 number of seconds to wait before echoing. If the user types a prefix
565 key (such as @kbd{C-x}) and then delays this many seconds before
566 continuing, the prefix key is echoed in the echo area. (Once echoing
567 begins in a key sequence, all subsequent characters in the same key
568 sequence are echoed immediately.)
569
570 If the value is zero, then command input is not echoed.
571 @end defopt
572
573 @defvar message-truncate-lines
574 Normally, displaying a long message resizes the echo area to display
575 the entire message. But if the variable @code{message-truncate-lines}
576 is non-@code{nil}, the echo area does not resize, and the message is
577 truncated to fit it.
578 @end defvar
579
580 The variable @code{max-mini-window-height}, which specifies the
581 maximum height for resizing minibuffer windows, also applies to the
582 echo area (which is really a special use of the minibuffer window;
583 @pxref{Minibuffer Misc}).
584
585 @node Warnings
586 @section Reporting Warnings
587 @cindex warnings
588
589 @dfn{Warnings} are a facility for a program to inform the user of a
590 possible problem, but continue running.
591
592 @menu
593 * Warning Basics:: Warnings concepts and functions to report them.
594 * Warning Variables:: Variables programs bind to customize their warnings.
595 * Warning Options:: Variables users set to control display of warnings.
596 * Delayed Warnings:: Deferring a warning until the end of a command.
597 @end menu
598
599 @node Warning Basics
600 @subsection Warning Basics
601 @cindex severity level
602
603 Every warning has a textual message, which explains the problem for
604 the user, and a @dfn{severity level} which is a symbol. Here are the
605 possible severity levels, in order of decreasing severity, and their
606 meanings:
607
608 @table @code
609 @item :emergency
610 A problem that will seriously impair Emacs operation soon
611 if you do not attend to it promptly.
612 @item :error
613 A report of data or circumstances that are inherently wrong.
614 @item :warning
615 A report of data or circumstances that are not inherently wrong, but
616 raise suspicion of a possible problem.
617 @item :debug
618 A report of information that may be useful if you are debugging.
619 @end table
620
621 When your program encounters invalid input data, it can either
622 signal a Lisp error by calling @code{error} or @code{signal} or report
623 a warning with severity @code{:error}. Signaling a Lisp error is the
624 easiest thing to do, but it means the program cannot continue
625 processing. If you want to take the trouble to implement a way to
626 continue processing despite the bad data, then reporting a warning of
627 severity @code{:error} is the right way to inform the user of the
628 problem. For instance, the Emacs Lisp byte compiler can report an
629 error that way and continue compiling other functions. (If the
630 program signals a Lisp error and then handles it with
631 @code{condition-case}, the user won't see the error message; it could
632 show the message to the user by reporting it as a warning.)
633
634 @c FIXME: Why use "(bytecomp)" instead of "'bytecomp" or simply
635 @c "bytecomp" here? The parens are part of warning-type-format but
636 @c not part of the warning type. --xfq
637 @cindex warning type
638 Each warning has a @dfn{warning type} to classify it. The type is a
639 list of symbols. The first symbol should be the custom group that you
640 use for the program's user options. For example, byte compiler
641 warnings use the warning type @code{(bytecomp)}. You can also
642 subcategorize the warnings, if you wish, by using more symbols in the
643 list.
644
645 @defun display-warning type message &optional level buffer-name
646 This function reports a warning, using @var{message} as the message
647 and @var{type} as the warning type. @var{level} should be the
648 severity level, with @code{:warning} being the default.
649
650 @var{buffer-name}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the name of the buffer
651 for logging the warning. By default, it is @file{*Warnings*}.
652 @end defun
653
654 @defun lwarn type level message &rest args
655 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
656 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message in the @file{*Warnings*}
657 buffer. In other respects it is equivalent to @code{display-warning}.
658 @end defun
659
660 @defun warn message &rest args
661 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
662 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message, @code{(emacs)} as the
663 type, and @code{:warning} as the severity level. It exists for
664 compatibility only; we recommend not using it, because you should
665 specify a specific warning type.
666 @end defun
667
668 @node Warning Variables
669 @subsection Warning Variables
670 @cindex warning variables
671
672 Programs can customize how their warnings appear by binding
673 the variables described in this section.
674
675 @defvar warning-levels
676 This list defines the meaning and severity order of the warning
677 severity levels. Each element defines one severity level,
678 and they are arranged in order of decreasing severity.
679
680 Each element has the form @code{(@var{level} @var{string}
681 @var{function})}, where @var{level} is the severity level it defines.
682 @var{string} specifies the textual description of this level.
683 @var{string} should use @samp{%s} to specify where to put the warning
684 type information, or it can omit the @samp{%s} so as not to include
685 that information.
686
687 The optional @var{function}, if non-@code{nil}, is a function to call
688 with no arguments, to get the user's attention.
689
690 Normally you should not change the value of this variable.
691 @end defvar
692
693 @defvar warning-prefix-function
694 If non-@code{nil}, the value is a function to generate prefix text for
695 warnings. Programs can bind the variable to a suitable function.
696 @code{display-warning} calls this function with the warnings buffer
697 current, and the function can insert text in it. That text becomes
698 the beginning of the warning message.
699
700 The function is called with two arguments, the severity level and its
701 entry in @code{warning-levels}. It should return a list to use as the
702 entry (this value need not be an actual member of
703 @code{warning-levels}). By constructing this value, the function can
704 change the severity of the warning, or specify different handling for
705 a given severity level.
706
707 If the variable's value is @code{nil} then there is no function
708 to call.
709 @end defvar
710
711 @defvar warning-series
712 Programs can bind this variable to @code{t} to say that the next
713 warning should begin a series. When several warnings form a series,
714 that means to leave point on the first warning of the series, rather
715 than keep moving it for each warning so that it appears on the last one.
716 The series ends when the local binding is unbound and
717 @code{warning-series} becomes @code{nil} again.
718
719 The value can also be a symbol with a function definition. That is
720 equivalent to @code{t}, except that the next warning will also call
721 the function with no arguments with the warnings buffer current. The
722 function can insert text which will serve as a header for the series
723 of warnings.
724
725 Once a series has begun, the value is a marker which points to the
726 buffer position in the warnings buffer of the start of the series.
727
728 The variable's normal value is @code{nil}, which means to handle
729 each warning separately.
730 @end defvar
731
732 @defvar warning-fill-prefix
733 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a fill prefix to
734 use for filling each warning's text.
735 @end defvar
736
737 @defvar warning-type-format
738 This variable specifies the format for displaying the warning type
739 in the warning message. The result of formatting the type this way
740 gets included in the message under the control of the string in the
741 entry in @code{warning-levels}. The default value is @code{" (%s)"}.
742 If you bind it to @code{""} then the warning type won't appear at
743 all.
744 @end defvar
745
746 @node Warning Options
747 @subsection Warning Options
748 @cindex warning options
749
750 These variables are used by users to control what happens
751 when a Lisp program reports a warning.
752
753 @defopt warning-minimum-level
754 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
755 shown immediately to the user. The default is @code{:warning}, which
756 means to immediately display all warnings except @code{:debug}
757 warnings.
758 @end defopt
759
760 @defopt warning-minimum-log-level
761 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
762 logged in the warnings buffer. The default is @code{:warning}, which
763 means to log all warnings except @code{:debug} warnings.
764 @end defopt
765
766 @defopt warning-suppress-types
767 This list specifies which warning types should not be displayed
768 immediately for the user. Each element of the list should be a list
769 of symbols. If its elements match the first elements in a warning
770 type, then that warning is not displayed immediately.
771 @end defopt
772
773 @defopt warning-suppress-log-types
774 This list specifies which warning types should not be logged in the
775 warnings buffer. Each element of the list should be a list of
776 symbols. If it matches the first few elements in a warning type, then
777 that warning is not logged.
778 @end defopt
779
780 @node Delayed Warnings
781 @subsection Delayed Warnings
782 @cindex delayed warnings
783
784 Sometimes, you may wish to avoid showing a warning while a command is
785 running, and only show it only after the end of the command. You can
786 use the variable @code{delayed-warnings-list} for this.
787
788 @defvar delayed-warnings-list
789 The value of this variable is a list of warnings to be displayed after
790 the current command has finished. Each element must be a list
791
792 @smallexample
793 (@var{type} @var{message} [@var{level} [@var{buffer-name}]])
794 @end smallexample
795
796 @noindent
797 with the same form, and the same meanings, as the argument list of
798 @code{display-warning} (@pxref{Warning Basics}). Immediately after
799 running @code{post-command-hook} (@pxref{Command Overview}), the Emacs
800 command loop displays all the warnings specified by this variable,
801 then resets it to @code{nil}.
802 @end defvar
803
804 Programs which need to further customize the delayed warnings
805 mechanism can change the variable @code{delayed-warnings-hook}:
806
807 @defvar delayed-warnings-hook
808 This is a normal hook which is run by the Emacs command loop, after
809 @code{post-command-hook}, in order to to process and display delayed
810 warnings.
811
812 Its default value is a list of two functions:
813
814 @smallexample
815 (collapse-delayed-warnings display-delayed-warnings)
816 @end smallexample
817
818 @findex collapse-delayed-warnings
819 @findex display-delayed-warnings
820 @noindent
821 The function @code{collapse-delayed-warnings} removes repeated entries
822 from @code{delayed-warnings-list}. The function
823 @code{display-delayed-warnings} calls @code{display-warning} on each
824 of the entries in @code{delayed-warnings-list}, in turn, and then sets
825 @code{delayed-warnings-list} to @code{nil}.
826 @end defvar
827
828 @node Invisible Text
829 @section Invisible Text
830
831 @cindex invisible text
832 You can make characters @dfn{invisible}, so that they do not appear on
833 the screen, with the @code{invisible} property. This can be either a
834 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}) or an overlay property
835 (@pxref{Overlays}). Cursor motion also partly ignores these
836 characters; if the command loop finds that point is inside a range of
837 invisible text after a command, it relocates point to the other side
838 of the text.
839
840 In the simplest case, any non-@code{nil} @code{invisible} property makes
841 a character invisible. This is the default case---if you don't alter
842 the default value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}, this is how the
843 @code{invisible} property works. You should normally use @code{t}
844 as the value of the @code{invisible} property if you don't plan
845 to set @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} yourself.
846
847 More generally, you can use the variable @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
848 to control which values of the @code{invisible} property make text
849 invisible. This permits you to classify the text into different subsets
850 in advance, by giving them different @code{invisible} values, and
851 subsequently make various subsets visible or invisible by changing the
852 value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
853
854 Controlling visibility with @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is
855 especially useful in a program to display the list of entries in a
856 database. It permits the implementation of convenient filtering
857 commands to view just a part of the entries in the database. Setting
858 this variable is very fast, much faster than scanning all the text in
859 the buffer looking for properties to change.
860
861 @defvar buffer-invisibility-spec
862 This variable specifies which kinds of @code{invisible} properties
863 actually make a character invisible. Setting this variable makes it
864 buffer-local.
865
866 @table @asis
867 @item @code{t}
868 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property is
869 non-@code{nil}. This is the default.
870
871 @item a list
872 Each element of the list specifies a criterion for invisibility; if a
873 character's @code{invisible} property fits any one of these criteria,
874 the character is invisible. The list can have two kinds of elements:
875
876 @table @code
877 @item @var{atom}
878 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
879 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
880 is done with @code{eq}.
881
882 @item (@var{atom} . t)
883 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
884 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
885 is done with @code{eq}. Moreover, a sequence of such characters
886 displays as an ellipsis.
887 @end table
888 @end table
889 @end defvar
890
891 Two functions are specifically provided for adding elements to
892 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and removing elements from it.
893
894 @defun add-to-invisibility-spec element
895 This function adds the element @var{element} to
896 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. If @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
897 was @code{t}, it changes to a list, @code{(t)}, so that text whose
898 @code{invisible} property is @code{t} remains invisible.
899 @end defun
900
901 @defun remove-from-invisibility-spec element
902 This removes the element @var{element} from
903 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. This does nothing if @var{element}
904 is not in the list.
905 @end defun
906
907 A convention for use of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is that a
908 major mode should use the mode's own name as an element of
909 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and as the value of the
910 @code{invisible} property:
911
912 @example
913 ;; @r{If you want to display an ellipsis:}
914 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
915 ;; @r{If you don't want ellipsis:}
916 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
917
918 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end)
919 'invisible 'my-symbol)
920
921 ;; @r{When done with the invisibility:}
922 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
923 ;; @r{Or respectively:}
924 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
925 @end example
926
927 You can check for invisibility using the following function:
928
929 @defun invisible-p pos-or-prop
930 If @var{pos-or-prop} is a marker or number, this function returns a
931 non-@code{nil} value if the text at that position is invisible.
932
933 If @var{pos-or-prop} is any other kind of Lisp object, that is taken
934 to mean a possible value of the @code{invisible} text or overlay
935 property. In that case, this function returns a non-@code{nil} value
936 if that value would cause text to become invisible, based on the
937 current value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
938 @end defun
939
940 @vindex line-move-ignore-invisible
941 Ordinarily, functions that operate on text or move point do not care
942 whether the text is invisible, they process invisible characters and
943 visible characters alike. The user-level line motion commands,
944 such as @code{next-line}, @code{previous-line}, ignore invisible
945 newlines if @code{line-move-ignore-invisible} is non-@code{nil} (the
946 default), i.e., behave like these invisible newlines didn't exist in
947 the buffer, but only because they are explicitly programmed to do so.
948
949 If a command ends with point inside or at the boundary of
950 invisible text, the main editing loop relocates point to one of the
951 two ends of the invisible text. Emacs chooses the direction of
952 relocation so that it is the same as the overall movement direction of
953 the command; if in doubt, it prefers a position where an inserted char
954 would not inherit the @code{invisible} property. Additionally, if the
955 text is not replaced by an ellipsis and the command only moved within
956 the invisible text, then point is moved one extra character so as to
957 try and reflect the command's movement by a visible movement of the
958 cursor.
959
960 Thus, if the command moved point back to an invisible range (with the usual
961 stickiness), Emacs moves point back to the beginning of that range. If the
962 command moved point forward into an invisible range, Emacs moves point forward
963 to the first visible character that follows the invisible text and then forward
964 one more character.
965
966 These @dfn{adjustments} of point that ended up in the middle of
967 invisible text can be disabled by setting @code{disable-point-adjustment}
968 to a non-@code{nil} value. @xref{Adjusting Point}.
969
970 Incremental search can make invisible overlays visible temporarily
971 and/or permanently when a match includes invisible text. To enable
972 this, the overlay should have a non-@code{nil}
973 @code{isearch-open-invisible} property. The property value should be a
974 function to be called with the overlay as an argument. This function
975 should make the overlay visible permanently; it is used when the match
976 overlaps the overlay on exit from the search.
977
978 During the search, such overlays are made temporarily visible by
979 temporarily modifying their invisible and intangible properties. If you
980 want this to be done differently for a certain overlay, give it an
981 @code{isearch-open-invisible-temporary} property which is a function.
982 The function is called with two arguments: the first is the overlay, and
983 the second is @code{nil} to make the overlay visible, or @code{t} to
984 make it invisible again.
985
986 @node Selective Display
987 @section Selective Display
988 @c @cindex selective display Duplicates selective-display
989
990 @dfn{Selective display} refers to a pair of related features for
991 hiding certain lines on the screen.
992
993 @cindex explicit selective display
994 The first variant, explicit selective display, was designed for use in a Lisp
995 program: it controls which lines are hidden by altering the text. This kind of
996 hiding is now obsolete; instead you can get the same effect with the
997 @code{invisible} property (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
998
999 In the second variant, the choice of lines to hide is made
1000 automatically based on indentation. This variant is designed to be a
1001 user-level feature.
1002
1003 The way you control explicit selective display is by replacing a
1004 newline (control-j) with a carriage return (control-m). The text that
1005 was formerly a line following that newline is now hidden. Strictly
1006 speaking, it is temporarily no longer a line at all, since only
1007 newlines can separate lines; it is now part of the previous line.
1008
1009 Selective display does not directly affect editing commands. For
1010 example, @kbd{C-f} (@code{forward-char}) moves point unhesitatingly
1011 into hidden text. However, the replacement of newline characters with
1012 carriage return characters affects some editing commands. For
1013 example, @code{next-line} skips hidden lines, since it searches only
1014 for newlines. Modes that use selective display can also define
1015 commands that take account of the newlines, or that control which
1016 parts of the text are hidden.
1017
1018 When you write a selectively displayed buffer into a file, all the
1019 control-m's are output as newlines. This means that when you next read
1020 in the file, it looks OK, with nothing hidden. The selective display
1021 effect is seen only within Emacs.
1022
1023 @defvar selective-display
1024 This buffer-local variable enables selective display. This means that
1025 lines, or portions of lines, may be made hidden.
1026
1027 @itemize @bullet
1028 @item
1029 If the value of @code{selective-display} is @code{t}, then the character
1030 control-m marks the start of hidden text; the control-m, and the rest
1031 of the line following it, are not displayed. This is explicit selective
1032 display.
1033
1034 @item
1035 If the value of @code{selective-display} is a positive integer, then
1036 lines that start with more than that many columns of indentation are not
1037 displayed.
1038 @end itemize
1039
1040 When some portion of a buffer is hidden, the vertical movement
1041 commands operate as if that portion did not exist, allowing a single
1042 @code{next-line} command to skip any number of hidden lines.
1043 However, character movement commands (such as @code{forward-char}) do
1044 not skip the hidden portion, and it is possible (if tricky) to insert
1045 or delete text in an hidden portion.
1046
1047 In the examples below, we show the @emph{display appearance} of the
1048 buffer @code{foo}, which changes with the value of
1049 @code{selective-display}. The @emph{contents} of the buffer do not
1050 change.
1051
1052 @example
1053 @group
1054 (setq selective-display nil)
1055 @result{} nil
1056
1057 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1058 1 on this column
1059 2on this column
1060 3n this column
1061 3n this column
1062 2on this column
1063 1 on this column
1064 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1065 @end group
1066
1067 @group
1068 (setq selective-display 2)
1069 @result{} 2
1070
1071 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1072 1 on this column
1073 2on this column
1074 2on this column
1075 1 on this column
1076 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1077 @end group
1078 @end example
1079 @end defvar
1080
1081 @defopt selective-display-ellipses
1082 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, then Emacs displays
1083 @samp{@dots{}} at the end of a line that is followed by hidden text.
1084 This example is a continuation of the previous one.
1085
1086 @example
1087 @group
1088 (setq selective-display-ellipses t)
1089 @result{} t
1090
1091 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1092 1 on this column
1093 2on this column ...
1094 2on this column
1095 1 on this column
1096 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1097 @end group
1098 @end example
1099
1100 You can use a display table to substitute other text for the ellipsis
1101 (@samp{@dots{}}). @xref{Display Tables}.
1102 @end defopt
1103
1104 @node Temporary Displays
1105 @section Temporary Displays
1106 @cindex temporary display
1107 @cindex temporary buffer display
1108
1109 Temporary displays are used by Lisp programs to put output into a
1110 buffer and then present it to the user for perusal rather than for
1111 editing. Many help commands use this feature.
1112
1113 @defmac with-output-to-temp-buffer buffer-name body@dots{}
1114 This function executes the forms in @var{body} while arranging to insert
1115 any output they print into the buffer named @var{buffer-name}, which is
1116 first created if necessary, and put into Help mode. (See the similar
1117 form @code{with-temp-buffer-window} below.) Finally, the buffer is
1118 displayed in some window, but that window is not selected.
1119
1120 If the forms in @var{body} do not change the major mode in the output
1121 buffer, so that it is still Help mode at the end of their execution,
1122 then @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} makes this buffer read-only at
1123 the end, and also scans it for function and variable names to make them
1124 into clickable cross-references. @xref{Docstring hyperlinks, , Tips for
1125 Documentation Strings}, in particular the item on hyperlinks in
1126 documentation strings, for more details.
1127
1128 The string @var{buffer-name} specifies the temporary buffer, which need
1129 not already exist. The argument must be a string, not a buffer. The
1130 buffer is erased initially (with no questions asked), and it is marked
1131 as unmodified after @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} exits.
1132
1133 @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} binds @code{standard-output} to the
1134 temporary buffer, then it evaluates the forms in @var{body}. Output
1135 using the Lisp output functions within @var{body} goes by default to
1136 that buffer (but screen display and messages in the echo area, although
1137 they are ``output'' in the general sense of the word, are not affected).
1138 @xref{Output Functions}.
1139
1140 Several hooks are available for customizing the behavior
1141 of this construct; they are listed below.
1142
1143 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned.
1144
1145 @example
1146 @group
1147 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1148 This is the contents of foo.
1149 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1150 @end group
1151
1152 @group
1153 (with-output-to-temp-buffer "foo"
1154 (print 20)
1155 (print standard-output))
1156 @result{} #<buffer foo>
1157
1158 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1159
1160 20
1161
1162 #<buffer foo>
1163
1164 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1165 @end group
1166 @end example
1167 @end defmac
1168
1169 @defopt temp-buffer-show-function
1170 If this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}
1171 calls it as a function to do the job of displaying a help buffer. The
1172 function gets one argument, which is the buffer it should display.
1173
1174 It is a good idea for this function to run @code{temp-buffer-show-hook}
1175 just as @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} normally would, inside of
1176 @code{save-selected-window} and with the chosen window and buffer
1177 selected.
1178 @end defopt
1179
1180 @defvar temp-buffer-setup-hook
1181 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} before
1182 evaluating @var{body}. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer is
1183 current. This hook is normally set up with a function to put the
1184 buffer in Help mode.
1185 @end defvar
1186
1187 @defvar temp-buffer-show-hook
1188 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} after
1189 displaying the temporary buffer. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer
1190 is current, and the window it was displayed in is selected.
1191 @end defvar
1192
1193 @defmac with-temp-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function body@dots{}
1194 This macro is similar to @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}. Like that
1195 construct, it executes @var{body} while arranging to insert any output
1196 it prints into the buffer named @var{buffer-or-name} and displays that
1197 buffer in some window. Unlike @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer},
1198 however, it does not automatically switch that buffer to Help mode.
1199
1200 The argument @var{buffer-or-name} specifies the temporary buffer. It
1201 can be either a buffer, which must already exist, or a string, in which
1202 case a buffer of that name is created, if necessary. The buffer is
1203 marked as unmodified and read-only when @code{with-temp-buffer-window}
1204 exits.
1205
1206 This macro does not call @code{temp-buffer-show-function}. Rather, it
1207 passes the @var{action} argument to @code{display-buffer}
1208 (@pxref{Choosing Window}) in order to display the buffer.
1209
1210 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned, unless the
1211 argument @var{quit-function} is specified. In that case, it is called
1212 with two arguments: the window showing the buffer and the result of
1213 @var{body}. The final return value is then whatever @var{quit-function}
1214 returns.
1215
1216 @vindex temp-buffer-window-setup-hook
1217 @vindex temp-buffer-window-show-hook
1218 This macro uses the normal hooks @code{temp-buffer-window-setup-hook}
1219 and @code{temp-buffer-window-show-hook} in place of the analogous hooks
1220 run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}.
1221 @end defmac
1222
1223 The two constructs described next are mostly identical to
1224 @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but differ from it as specified:
1225
1226 @defmac with-current-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1227 This macro is like @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but unlike that makes
1228 the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} current for running
1229 @var{body}.
1230 @end defmac
1231
1232 @defmac with-displayed-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1233 This macro is like @code{with-current-buffer-window} but unlike that
1234 displays the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} @emph{before}
1235 running @var{body}.
1236 @end defmac
1237
1238 A window showing a temporary buffer can be fit to the size of that
1239 buffer using the following mode:
1240
1241 @defopt temp-buffer-resize-mode
1242 When this minor mode is enabled, windows showing a temporary buffer are
1243 automatically resized to fit their buffer's contents.
1244
1245 A window is resized if and only if it has been specially created for the
1246 buffer. In particular, windows that have shown another buffer before
1247 are not resized. By default, this mode uses @code{fit-window-to-buffer}
1248 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) for resizing. You can specify a different
1249 function by customizing the options @code{temp-buffer-max-height} and
1250 @code{temp-buffer-max-width} below.
1251 @end defopt
1252
1253 @defopt temp-buffer-max-height
1254 This option specifies the maximum height (in lines) of a window
1255 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1256 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the height
1257 for such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return
1258 a positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to
1259 be resized is selected.
1260 @end defopt
1261
1262 @defopt temp-buffer-max-width
1263 This option specifies the maximum width of a window (in columns)
1264 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1265 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the width for
1266 such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return a
1267 positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to be
1268 resized is selected.
1269 @end defopt
1270
1271 The following function uses the current buffer for temporal display:
1272
1273 @defun momentary-string-display string position &optional char message
1274 This function momentarily displays @var{string} in the current buffer at
1275 @var{position}. It has no effect on the undo list or on the buffer's
1276 modification status.
1277
1278 The momentary display remains until the next input event. If the next
1279 input event is @var{char}, @code{momentary-string-display} ignores it
1280 and returns. Otherwise, that event remains buffered for subsequent use
1281 as input. Thus, typing @var{char} will simply remove the string from
1282 the display, while typing (say) @kbd{C-f} will remove the string from
1283 the display and later (presumably) move point forward. The argument
1284 @var{char} is a space by default.
1285
1286 The return value of @code{momentary-string-display} is not meaningful.
1287
1288 If the string @var{string} does not contain control characters, you can
1289 do the same job in a more general way by creating (and then subsequently
1290 deleting) an overlay with a @code{before-string} property.
1291 @xref{Overlay Properties}.
1292
1293 If @var{message} is non-@code{nil}, it is displayed in the echo area
1294 while @var{string} is displayed in the buffer. If it is @code{nil}, a
1295 default message says to type @var{char} to continue.
1296
1297 In this example, point is initially located at the beginning of the
1298 second line:
1299
1300 @example
1301 @group
1302 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1303 This is the contents of foo.
1304 @point{}Second line.
1305 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1306 @end group
1307
1308 @group
1309 (momentary-string-display
1310 "**** Important Message! ****"
1311 (point) ?\r
1312 "Type RET when done reading")
1313 @result{} t
1314 @end group
1315
1316 @group
1317 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1318 This is the contents of foo.
1319 **** Important Message! ****Second line.
1320 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1321
1322 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1323 Type RET when done reading
1324 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1325 @end group
1326 @end example
1327 @end defun
1328
1329 @node Overlays
1330 @section Overlays
1331 @cindex overlays
1332 @c FIXME: mention intervals in this section?
1333
1334 You can use @dfn{overlays} to alter the appearance of a buffer's text on
1335 the screen, for the sake of presentation features. An overlay is an
1336 object that belongs to a particular buffer, and has a specified
1337 beginning and end. It also has properties that you can examine and set;
1338 these affect the display of the text within the overlay.
1339
1340 @cindex scalability of overlays
1341 @cindex overlays, scalability
1342 The visual effect of an overlay is the same as of the corresponding
1343 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}). However, due to a different
1344 implementation, overlays generally don't scale well (many operations
1345 take a time that is proportional to the number of overlays in the
1346 buffer). If you need to affect the visual appearance of many portions
1347 in the buffer, we recommend using text properties.
1348
1349 An overlay uses markers to record its beginning and end; thus,
1350 editing the text of the buffer adjusts the beginning and end of each
1351 overlay so that it stays with the text. When you create the overlay,
1352 you can specify whether text inserted at the beginning should be
1353 inside the overlay or outside, and likewise for the end of the overlay.
1354
1355 @menu
1356 * Managing Overlays:: Creating and moving overlays.
1357 * Overlay Properties:: How to read and set properties.
1358 What properties do to the screen display.
1359 * Finding Overlays:: Searching for overlays.
1360 @end menu
1361
1362 @node Managing Overlays
1363 @subsection Managing Overlays
1364 @cindex managing overlays
1365 @cindex overlays, managing
1366
1367 This section describes the functions to create, delete and move
1368 overlays, and to examine their contents. Overlay changes are not
1369 recorded in the buffer's undo list, since the overlays are not
1370 part of the buffer's contents.
1371
1372 @defun overlayp object
1373 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an overlay.
1374 @end defun
1375
1376 @defun make-overlay start end &optional buffer front-advance rear-advance
1377 This function creates and returns an overlay that belongs to
1378 @var{buffer} and ranges from @var{start} to @var{end}. Both @var{start}
1379 and @var{end} must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or
1380 markers. If @var{buffer} is omitted, the overlay is created in the
1381 current buffer.
1382
1383 @cindex empty overlay
1384 @cindex overlay, empty
1385 An overlay whose @var{start} and @var{end} specify the same buffer
1386 position is known as @dfn{empty}. A non-empty overlay can become
1387 empty if the text between its @var{start} and @var{end} is deleted.
1388 When that happens, the overlay is by default not deleted, but you can
1389 cause it to be deleted by giving it the @samp{evaporate} property
1390 (@pxref{Overlay Properties, evaporate property}).
1391
1392 The arguments @var{front-advance} and @var{rear-advance} specify the
1393 marker insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of
1394 the overlay, respectively. @xref{Marker Insertion Types}. If they
1395 are both @code{nil}, the default, then the overlay extends to include
1396 any text inserted at the beginning, but not text inserted at the end.
1397 If @var{front-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the
1398 beginning of the overlay is excluded from the overlay. If
1399 @var{rear-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the end of the
1400 overlay is included in the overlay.
1401 @end defun
1402
1403 @defun overlay-start overlay
1404 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} starts,
1405 as an integer.
1406 @end defun
1407
1408 @defun overlay-end overlay
1409 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} ends,
1410 as an integer.
1411 @end defun
1412
1413 @defun overlay-buffer overlay
1414 This function returns the buffer that @var{overlay} belongs to. It
1415 returns @code{nil} if @var{overlay} has been deleted.
1416 @end defun
1417
1418 @defun delete-overlay overlay
1419 This function deletes @var{overlay}. The overlay continues to exist as
1420 a Lisp object, and its property list is unchanged, but it ceases to be
1421 attached to the buffer it belonged to, and ceases to have any effect on
1422 display.
1423
1424 A deleted overlay is not permanently disconnected. You can give it a
1425 position in a buffer again by calling @code{move-overlay}.
1426 @end defun
1427
1428 @defun move-overlay overlay start end &optional buffer
1429 This function moves @var{overlay} to @var{buffer}, and places its bounds
1430 at @var{start} and @var{end}. Both arguments @var{start} and @var{end}
1431 must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or markers.
1432
1433 If @var{buffer} is omitted, @var{overlay} stays in the same buffer it
1434 was already associated with; if @var{overlay} was deleted, it goes into
1435 the current buffer.
1436
1437 The return value is @var{overlay}.
1438
1439 This is the only valid way to change the endpoints of an overlay. Do
1440 not try modifying the markers in the overlay by hand, as that fails to
1441 update other vital data structures and can cause some overlays to be
1442 lost.
1443 @end defun
1444
1445 @defun remove-overlays &optional start end name value
1446 This function removes all the overlays between @var{start} and
1447 @var{end} whose property @var{name} has the value @var{value}. It can
1448 move the endpoints of the overlays in the region, or split them.
1449
1450 If @var{name} is omitted or @code{nil}, it means to delete all overlays in
1451 the specified region. If @var{start} and/or @var{end} are omitted or
1452 @code{nil}, that means the beginning and end of the buffer respectively.
1453 Therefore, @code{(remove-overlays)} removes all the overlays in the
1454 current buffer.
1455 @end defun
1456
1457 @defun copy-overlay overlay
1458 This function returns a copy of @var{overlay}. The copy has the same
1459 endpoints and properties as @var{overlay}. However, the marker
1460 insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of the
1461 overlay are set to their default values (@pxref{Marker Insertion
1462 Types}).
1463 @end defun
1464
1465 Here are some examples:
1466
1467 @example
1468 ;; @r{Create an overlay.}
1469 (setq foo (make-overlay 1 10))
1470 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 10 in display.texi>
1471 (overlay-start foo)
1472 @result{} 1
1473 (overlay-end foo)
1474 @result{} 10
1475 (overlay-buffer foo)
1476 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1477 ;; @r{Give it a property we can check later.}
1478 (overlay-put foo 'happy t)
1479 @result{} t
1480 ;; @r{Verify the property is present.}
1481 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1482 @result{} t
1483 ;; @r{Move the overlay.}
1484 (move-overlay foo 5 20)
1485 @result{} #<overlay from 5 to 20 in display.texi>
1486 (overlay-start foo)
1487 @result{} 5
1488 (overlay-end foo)
1489 @result{} 20
1490 ;; @r{Delete the overlay.}
1491 (delete-overlay foo)
1492 @result{} nil
1493 ;; @r{Verify it is deleted.}
1494 foo
1495 @result{} #<overlay in no buffer>
1496 ;; @r{A deleted overlay has no position.}
1497 (overlay-start foo)
1498 @result{} nil
1499 (overlay-end foo)
1500 @result{} nil
1501 (overlay-buffer foo)
1502 @result{} nil
1503 ;; @r{Undelete the overlay.}
1504 (move-overlay foo 1 20)
1505 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 20 in display.texi>
1506 ;; @r{Verify the results.}
1507 (overlay-start foo)
1508 @result{} 1
1509 (overlay-end foo)
1510 @result{} 20
1511 (overlay-buffer foo)
1512 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1513 ;; @r{Moving and deleting the overlay does not change its properties.}
1514 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1515 @result{} t
1516 @end example
1517
1518 Emacs stores the overlays of each buffer in two lists, divided
1519 around an arbitrary center position. One list extends backwards
1520 through the buffer from that center position, and the other extends
1521 forwards from that center position. The center position can be anywhere
1522 in the buffer.
1523
1524 @defun overlay-recenter pos
1525 This function recenters the overlays of the current buffer around
1526 position @var{pos}. That makes overlay lookup faster for positions
1527 near @var{pos}, but slower for positions far away from @var{pos}.
1528 @end defun
1529
1530 A loop that scans the buffer forwards, creating overlays, can run
1531 faster if you do @code{(overlay-recenter (point-max))} first.
1532
1533 @node Overlay Properties
1534 @subsection Overlay Properties
1535 @cindex overlay properties
1536
1537 Overlay properties are like text properties in that the properties that
1538 alter how a character is displayed can come from either source. But in
1539 most respects they are different. @xref{Text Properties}, for comparison.
1540
1541 Text properties are considered a part of the text; overlays and
1542 their properties are specifically considered not to be part of the
1543 text. Thus, copying text between various buffers and strings
1544 preserves text properties, but does not try to preserve overlays.
1545 Changing a buffer's text properties marks the buffer as modified,
1546 while moving an overlay or changing its properties does not. Unlike
1547 text property changes, overlay property changes are not recorded in
1548 the buffer's undo list.
1549
1550 Since more than one overlay can specify a property value for the
1551 same character, Emacs lets you specify a priority value of each
1552 overlay. In case two overlays have the same priority value, and one
1553 is nested in the other, then the inner one will have priority over the
1554 outer one. If neither is nested in the other then you should not make
1555 assumptions about which overlay will prevail.
1556
1557 These functions read and set the properties of an overlay:
1558
1559 @defun overlay-get overlay prop
1560 This function returns the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1561 @var{overlay}, if any. If @var{overlay} does not record any value for
1562 that property, but it does have a @code{category} property which is a
1563 symbol, that symbol's @var{prop} property is used. Otherwise, the value
1564 is @code{nil}.
1565 @end defun
1566
1567 @defun overlay-put overlay prop value
1568 This function sets the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1569 @var{overlay} to @var{value}. It returns @var{value}.
1570 @end defun
1571
1572 @defun overlay-properties overlay
1573 This returns a copy of the property list of @var{overlay}.
1574 @end defun
1575
1576 See also the function @code{get-char-property} which checks both
1577 overlay properties and text properties for a given character.
1578 @xref{Examining Properties}.
1579
1580 Many overlay properties have special meanings; here is a table
1581 of them:
1582
1583 @table @code
1584 @item priority
1585 @kindex priority @r{(overlay property)}
1586 This property's value determines the priority of the overlay.
1587 If you want to specify a priority value, use either @code{nil}
1588 (or zero), or a positive integer. Any other value has undefined behavior.
1589
1590 The priority matters when two or more overlays cover the same
1591 character and both specify the same property; the one whose
1592 @code{priority} value is larger overrides the other. For the
1593 @code{face} property, the higher priority overlay's value does not
1594 completely override the other value; instead, its face attributes
1595 override the face attributes of the lower priority @code{face}
1596 property.
1597
1598 Currently, all overlays take priority over text properties.
1599
1600 Note that Emacs sometimes uses non-numeric priority values for some of
1601 its internal overlays, so do not try to do arithmetic on the
1602 priority of an overlay (unless it is one that you created). If you
1603 need to put overlays in priority order, use the @var{sorted} argument
1604 of @code{overlays-at}. @xref{Finding Overlays}.
1605
1606 @item window
1607 @kindex window @r{(overlay property)}
1608 If the @code{window} property is non-@code{nil}, then the overlay
1609 applies only on that window.
1610
1611 @item category
1612 @kindex category @r{(overlay property)}
1613 If an overlay has a @code{category} property, we call it the
1614 @dfn{category} of the overlay. It should be a symbol. The properties
1615 of the symbol serve as defaults for the properties of the overlay.
1616
1617 @item face
1618 @kindex face @r{(overlay property)}
1619 This property controls the appearance of the text (@pxref{Faces}).
1620 The value of the property can be the following:
1621
1622 @itemize @bullet
1623 @item
1624 A face name (a symbol or string).
1625
1626 @item
1627 An anonymous face: a property list of the form @code{(@var{keyword}
1628 @var{value} @dots{})}, where each @var{keyword} is a face attribute
1629 name and @var{value} is a value for that attribute.
1630
1631 @item
1632 A list of faces. Each list element should be either a face name or an
1633 anonymous face. This specifies a face which is an aggregate of the
1634 attributes of each of the listed faces. Faces occurring earlier in
1635 the list have higher priority.
1636
1637 @item
1638 A cons cell of the form @code{(foreground-color . @var{color-name})}
1639 or @code{(background-color . @var{color-name})}. This specifies the
1640 foreground or background color, similar to @code{(:foreground
1641 @var{color-name})} or @code{(:background @var{color-name})}. This
1642 form is supported for backward compatibility only, and should be
1643 avoided.
1644 @end itemize
1645
1646 @item mouse-face
1647 @kindex mouse-face @r{(overlay property)}
1648 This property is used instead of @code{face} when the mouse is within
1649 the range of the overlay. However, Emacs ignores all face attributes
1650 from this property that alter the text size (e.g., @code{:height},
1651 @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}). Those attributes are always the
1652 same as in the unhighlighted text.
1653
1654 @item display
1655 @kindex display @r{(overlay property)}
1656 This property activates various features that change the
1657 way text is displayed. For example, it can make text appear taller
1658 or shorter, higher or lower, wider or narrower, or replaced with an image.
1659 @xref{Display Property}.
1660
1661 @item help-echo
1662 @kindex help-echo @r{(overlay property)}
1663 If an overlay has a @code{help-echo} property, then when you move the
1664 mouse onto the text in the overlay, Emacs displays a help string in the
1665 echo area, or in the tooltip window. For details see @ref{Text
1666 help-echo}.
1667
1668 @item field
1669 @kindex field @r{(overlay property)}
1670 @c Copied from Special Properties.
1671 Consecutive characters with the same @code{field} property constitute a
1672 @emph{field}. Some motion functions including @code{forward-word} and
1673 @code{beginning-of-line} stop moving at a field boundary.
1674 @xref{Fields}.
1675
1676 @item modification-hooks
1677 @kindex modification-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1678 This property's value is a list of functions to be called if any
1679 character within the overlay is changed or if text is inserted strictly
1680 within the overlay.
1681
1682 The hook functions are called both before and after each change.
1683 If the functions save the information they receive, and compare notes
1684 between calls, they can determine exactly what change has been made
1685 in the buffer text.
1686
1687 When called before a change, each function receives four arguments: the
1688 overlay, @code{nil}, and the beginning and end of the text range to be
1689 modified.
1690
1691 When called after a change, each function receives five arguments: the
1692 overlay, @code{t}, the beginning and end of the text range just
1693 modified, and the length of the pre-change text replaced by that range.
1694 (For an insertion, the pre-change length is zero; for a deletion, that
1695 length is the number of characters deleted, and the post-change
1696 beginning and end are equal.)
1697
1698 If these functions modify the buffer, they should bind
1699 @code{inhibit-modification-hooks} to @code{t} around doing so, to
1700 avoid confusing the internal mechanism that calls these hooks.
1701
1702 Text properties also support the @code{modification-hooks} property,
1703 but the details are somewhat different (@pxref{Special Properties}).
1704
1705 @item insert-in-front-hooks
1706 @kindex insert-in-front-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1707 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1708 after inserting text right at the beginning of the overlay. The calling
1709 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1710
1711 @item insert-behind-hooks
1712 @kindex insert-behind-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1713 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1714 after inserting text right at the end of the overlay. The calling
1715 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1716
1717 @item invisible
1718 @kindex invisible @r{(overlay property)}
1719 The @code{invisible} property can make the text in the overlay
1720 invisible, which means that it does not appear on the screen.
1721 @xref{Invisible Text}, for details.
1722
1723 @item intangible
1724 @kindex intangible @r{(overlay property)}
1725 The @code{intangible} property on an overlay works just like the
1726 @code{intangible} text property. It is obsolete. @xref{Special
1727 Properties}, for details.
1728
1729 @item isearch-open-invisible
1730 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1731 visible, permanently, if the final match overlaps it. @xref{Invisible
1732 Text}.
1733
1734 @item isearch-open-invisible-temporary
1735 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1736 visible, temporarily, during the search. @xref{Invisible Text}.
1737
1738 @item before-string
1739 @kindex before-string @r{(overlay property)}
1740 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the beginning
1741 of the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1742 sense---only on the screen.
1743
1744 @item after-string
1745 @kindex after-string @r{(overlay property)}
1746 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the end of
1747 the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1748 sense---only on the screen.
1749
1750 @item line-prefix
1751 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each
1752 non-continuation line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1753
1754 @item wrap-prefix
1755 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each continuation
1756 line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1757
1758 @item evaporate
1759 @kindex evaporate @r{(overlay property)}
1760 If this property is non-@code{nil}, the overlay is deleted automatically
1761 if it becomes empty (i.e., if its length becomes zero). If you give
1762 an empty overlay (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) a
1763 non-@code{nil} @code{evaporate} property, that deletes it immediately.
1764 Note that, unless an overlay has this property, it will not be deleted
1765 when the text between its starting and ending positions is deleted
1766 from the buffer.
1767
1768 @item keymap
1769 @cindex keymap of character (and overlays)
1770 @kindex keymap @r{(overlay property)}
1771 If this property is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a keymap for a portion of the
1772 text. This keymap is used when the character after point is within the
1773 overlay, and takes precedence over most other keymaps. @xref{Active Keymaps}.
1774
1775 @item local-map
1776 @kindex local-map @r{(overlay property)}
1777 The @code{local-map} property is similar to @code{keymap} but replaces the
1778 buffer's local map rather than augmenting existing keymaps. This also means it
1779 has lower precedence than minor mode keymaps.
1780 @end table
1781
1782 The @code{keymap} and @code{local-map} properties do not affect a
1783 string displayed by the @code{before-string}, @code{after-string}, or
1784 @code{display} properties. This is only relevant for mouse clicks and
1785 other mouse events that fall on the string, since point is never on
1786 the string. To bind special mouse events for the string, assign it a
1787 @code{keymap} or @code{local-map} text property. @xref{Special
1788 Properties}.
1789
1790 @node Finding Overlays
1791 @subsection Searching for Overlays
1792 @cindex searching for overlays
1793 @cindex overlays, searching for
1794
1795 @defun overlays-at pos &optional sorted
1796 This function returns a list of all the overlays that cover the character at
1797 position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If @var{sorted} is non-@code{nil},
1798 the list is in decreasing order of priority, otherwise it is in no particular
1799 order. An overlay contains position @var{pos} if it begins at or before
1800 @var{pos}, and ends after @var{pos}.
1801
1802 To illustrate usage, here is a Lisp function that returns a list of the
1803 overlays that specify property @var{prop} for the character at point:
1804
1805 @smallexample
1806 (defun find-overlays-specifying (prop)
1807 (let ((overlays (overlays-at (point)))
1808 found)
1809 (while overlays
1810 (let ((overlay (car overlays)))
1811 (if (overlay-get overlay prop)
1812 (setq found (cons overlay found))))
1813 (setq overlays (cdr overlays)))
1814 found))
1815 @end smallexample
1816 @end defun
1817
1818 @defun overlays-in beg end
1819 This function returns a list of the overlays that overlap the region
1820 @var{beg} through @var{end}. An overlay overlaps with a region if it
1821 contains one or more characters in the region; empty overlays
1822 (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) overlap if they are at
1823 @var{beg}, strictly between @var{beg} and @var{end}, or at @var{end}
1824 when @var{end} denotes the position at the end of the buffer.
1825 @end defun
1826
1827 @defun next-overlay-change pos
1828 This function returns the buffer position of the next beginning or end
1829 of an overlay, after @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1830 @code{(point-max)}.
1831 @end defun
1832
1833 @defun previous-overlay-change pos
1834 This function returns the buffer position of the previous beginning or
1835 end of an overlay, before @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1836 @code{(point-min)}.
1837 @end defun
1838
1839 As an example, here's a simplified (and inefficient) version of the
1840 primitive function @code{next-single-char-property-change}
1841 (@pxref{Property Search}). It searches forward from position
1842 @var{pos} for the next position where the value of a given property
1843 @code{prop}, as obtained from either overlays or text properties,
1844 changes.
1845
1846 @smallexample
1847 (defun next-single-char-property-change (position prop)
1848 (save-excursion
1849 (goto-char position)
1850 (let ((propval (get-char-property (point) prop)))
1851 (while (and (not (eobp))
1852 (eq (get-char-property (point) prop) propval))
1853 (goto-char (min (next-overlay-change (point))
1854 (next-single-property-change (point) prop)))))
1855 (point)))
1856 @end smallexample
1857
1858 @node Size of Displayed Text
1859 @section Size of Displayed Text
1860 @cindex size of text on display
1861 @cindex character width on display
1862
1863 Since not all characters have the same width, these functions let you
1864 check the width of a character. @xref{Primitive Indent}, and
1865 @ref{Screen Lines}, for related functions.
1866
1867 @defun char-width char
1868 This function returns the width in columns of the character
1869 @var{char}, if it were displayed in the current buffer (i.e., taking
1870 into account the buffer's display table, if any; @pxref{Display
1871 Tables}). The width of a tab character is usually @code{tab-width}
1872 (@pxref{Usual Display}).
1873 @end defun
1874
1875 @defun string-width string
1876 This function returns the width in columns of the string @var{string},
1877 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
1878 @end defun
1879
1880 @defun truncate-string-to-width string width &optional start-column padding ellipsis
1881 This function returns the part of @var{string} that fits within
1882 @var{width} columns, as a new string.
1883
1884 If @var{string} does not reach @var{width}, then the result ends where
1885 @var{string} ends. If one multi-column character in @var{string}
1886 extends across the column @var{width}, that character is not included in
1887 the result. Thus, the result can fall short of @var{width} but cannot
1888 go beyond it.
1889
1890 The optional argument @var{start-column} specifies the starting column.
1891 If this is non-@code{nil}, then the first @var{start-column} columns of
1892 the string are omitted from the value. If one multi-column character in
1893 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}, that
1894 character is not included.
1895
1896 The optional argument @var{padding}, if non-@code{nil}, is a padding
1897 character added at the beginning and end of the result string, to extend
1898 it to exactly @var{width} columns. The padding character is used at the
1899 end of the result if it falls short of @var{width}. It is also used at
1900 the beginning of the result if one multi-column character in
1901 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}.
1902
1903 @vindex truncate-string-ellipsis
1904 If @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil}, it should be a string which will
1905 replace the end of @var{string} (including any padding) if it extends
1906 beyond @var{width}, unless the display width of @var{string} is equal
1907 to or less than the display width of @var{ellipsis}. If
1908 @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil} and not a string, it stands for
1909 the value of the variable @code{truncate-string-ellipsis}.
1910
1911 @example
1912 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4)
1913 @result{} "ab"
1914 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4 ?\s)
1915 @result{} " ab "
1916 @end example
1917 @end defun
1918
1919 The following function returns the size in pixels of text as if it were
1920 displayed in a given window. This function is used by
1921 @code{fit-window-to-buffer} and @code{fit-frame-to-buffer}
1922 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) to make a window exactly as large as the text
1923 it contains.
1924
1925 @defun window-text-pixel-size &optional window from to x-limit y-limit mode-and-header-line
1926 This function returns the size of the text of @var{window}'s buffer in
1927 pixels. @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected
1928 one. The return value is a cons of the maximum pixel-width of any text
1929 line and the maximum pixel-height of all text lines.
1930
1931 The optional argument @var{from}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the first
1932 text position to consider and defaults to the minimum accessible
1933 position of the buffer. If @var{from} is @code{t}, it uses the minimum
1934 accessible position that is not a newline character. The optional
1935 argument @var{to}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the last text position
1936 to consider and defaults to the maximum accessible position of the
1937 buffer. If @var{to} is @code{t}, it uses the maximum accessible
1938 position that is not a newline character.
1939
1940 The optional argument @var{x-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1941 maximum pixel-width that can be returned. @var{x-limit} @code{nil} or
1942 omitted, means to use the pixel-width of @var{window}'s body
1943 (@pxref{Window Sizes}); this is useful when the caller does not intend
1944 to change the width of @var{window}. Otherwise, the caller should
1945 specify here the maximum width @var{window}'s body may assume. Text
1946 whose x-coordinate is beyond @var{x-limit} is ignored. Since
1947 calculating the width of long lines can take some time, it's always a
1948 good idea to make this argument as small as needed; in particular, if
1949 the buffer might contain long lines that will be truncated anyway.
1950
1951 The optional argument @var{y-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1952 maximum pixel-height that can be returned. Text lines whose
1953 y-coordinate is beyond @var{y-limit} are ignored. Since calculating the
1954 pixel-height of a large buffer can take some time, it makes sense to
1955 specify this argument; in particular, if the caller does not know the
1956 size of the buffer.
1957
1958 The optional argument @var{mode-and-header-line} @code{nil} or omitted
1959 means to not include the height of the mode- or header-line of
1960 @var{window} in the return value. If it is either the symbol
1961 @code{mode-line} or @code{header-line}, include only the height of that
1962 line, if present, in the return value. If it is @code{t}, include the
1963 height of both, if present, in the return value.
1964 @end defun
1965
1966
1967 @node Line Height
1968 @section Line Height
1969 @cindex line height
1970 @cindex height of a line
1971
1972 The total height of each display line consists of the height of the
1973 contents of the line, plus optional additional vertical line spacing
1974 above or below the display line.
1975
1976 The height of the line contents is the maximum height of any character
1977 or image on that display line, including the final newline if there is
1978 one. (A display line that is continued doesn't include a final
1979 newline.) That is the default line height, if you do nothing to specify
1980 a greater height. (In the most common case, this equals the height of
1981 the corresponding frame's default font, see @ref{Frame Font}.)
1982
1983 There are several ways to explicitly specify a larger line height,
1984 either by specifying an absolute height for the display line, or by
1985 specifying vertical space. However, no matter what you specify, the
1986 actual line height can never be less than the default.
1987
1988 @kindex line-height @r{(text property)}
1989 A newline can have a @code{line-height} text or overlay property
1990 that controls the total height of the display line ending in that
1991 newline.
1992
1993 If the property value is @code{t}, the newline character has no
1994 effect on the displayed height of the line---the visible contents
1995 alone determine the height. This is useful for tiling small images
1996 (or image slices) without adding blank areas between the images.
1997
1998 If the property value is a list of the form @code{(@var{height}
1999 @var{total})}, that adds extra space @emph{below} the display line.
2000 First Emacs uses @var{height} as a height spec to control extra space
2001 @emph{above} the line; then it adds enough space @emph{below} the line
2002 to bring the total line height up to @var{total}. In this case, the
2003 other ways to specify the line spacing are ignored.
2004
2005 @cindex height spec
2006 Any other kind of property value is a height spec, which translates
2007 into a number---the specified line height. There are several ways to
2008 write a height spec; here's how each of them translates into a number:
2009
2010 @table @code
2011 @item @var{integer}
2012 If the height spec is a positive integer, the height value is that integer.
2013 @item @var{float}
2014 If the height spec is a float, @var{float}, the numeric height value
2015 is @var{float} times the frame's default line height.
2016 @item (@var{face} . @var{ratio})
2017 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2018 is @var{ratio} times the height of face @var{face}. @var{ratio} can
2019 be any type of number, or @code{nil} which means a ratio of 1.
2020 If @var{face} is @code{t}, it refers to the current face.
2021 @item (nil . @var{ratio})
2022 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2023 is @var{ratio} times the height of the contents of the line.
2024 @end table
2025
2026 Thus, any valid height spec determines the height in pixels, one way
2027 or another. If the line contents' height is less than that, Emacs
2028 adds extra vertical space above the line to achieve the specified
2029 total height.
2030
2031 If you don't specify the @code{line-height} property, the line's
2032 height consists of the contents' height plus the line spacing.
2033 There are several ways to specify the line spacing for different
2034 parts of Emacs text.
2035
2036 On graphical terminals, you can specify the line spacing for all
2037 lines in a frame, using the @code{line-spacing} frame parameter
2038 (@pxref{Layout Parameters}). However, if the default value of
2039 @code{line-spacing} is non-@code{nil}, it overrides the
2040 frame's @code{line-spacing} parameter. An integer specifies the
2041 number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number specifies
2042 the spacing relative to the frame's default line height.
2043
2044 @vindex line-spacing
2045 You can specify the line spacing for all lines in a buffer via the
2046 buffer-local @code{line-spacing} variable. An integer specifies
2047 the number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number
2048 specifies the spacing relative to the default frame line height. This
2049 overrides line spacings specified for the frame.
2050
2051 @kindex line-spacing @r{(text property)}
2052 Finally, a newline can have a @code{line-spacing} text or overlay
2053 property that overrides the default frame line spacing and the buffer
2054 local @code{line-spacing} variable, for the display line ending in
2055 that newline.
2056
2057 One way or another, these mechanisms specify a Lisp value for the
2058 spacing of each line. The value is a height spec, and it translates
2059 into a Lisp value as described above. However, in this case the
2060 numeric height value specifies the line spacing, rather than the line
2061 height.
2062
2063 On text terminals, the line spacing cannot be altered.
2064
2065 @node Faces
2066 @section Faces
2067 @cindex faces
2068
2069 A @dfn{face} is a collection of graphical attributes for displaying
2070 text: font, foreground color, background color, optional underlining,
2071 etc. Faces control how Emacs displays text in buffers, as well as
2072 other parts of the frame such as the mode line.
2073
2074 @cindex anonymous face
2075 One way to represent a face is as a property list of attributes,
2076 like @code{(:foreground "red" :weight bold)}. Such a list is called
2077 an @dfn{anonymous face}. For example, you can assign an anonymous
2078 face as the value of the @code{face} text property, and Emacs will
2079 display the underlying text with the specified attributes.
2080 @xref{Special Properties}.
2081
2082 @cindex face name
2083 More commonly, a face is referred to via a @dfn{face name}: a Lisp
2084 symbol associated with a set of face attributes@footnote{For backward
2085 compatibility, you can also use a string to specify a face name; that
2086 is equivalent to a Lisp symbol with the same name.}. Named faces are
2087 defined using the @code{defface} macro (@pxref{Defining Faces}).
2088 Emacs comes with several standard named faces (@pxref{Basic Faces}).
2089
2090 Many parts of Emacs required named faces, and do not accept
2091 anonymous faces. These include the functions documented in
2092 @ref{Attribute Functions}, and the variable @code{font-lock-keywords}
2093 (@pxref{Search-based Fontification}). Unless otherwise stated, we
2094 will use the term @dfn{face} to refer only to named faces.
2095
2096 @defun facep object
2097 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if @var{object} is a
2098 named face: a Lisp symbol or string which serves as a face name.
2099 Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2100 @end defun
2101
2102 @menu
2103 * Face Attributes:: What is in a face?
2104 * Defining Faces:: How to define a face.
2105 * Attribute Functions:: Functions to examine and set face attributes.
2106 * Displaying Faces:: How Emacs combines the faces specified for a character.
2107 * Face Remapping:: Remapping faces to alternative definitions.
2108 * Face Functions:: How to define and examine faces.
2109 * Auto Faces:: Hook for automatic face assignment.
2110 * Basic Faces:: Faces that are defined by default.
2111 * Font Selection:: Finding the best available font for a face.
2112 * Font Lookup:: Looking up the names of available fonts
2113 and information about them.
2114 * Fontsets:: A fontset is a collection of fonts
2115 that handle a range of character sets.
2116 * Low-Level Font:: Lisp representation for character display fonts.
2117 @end menu
2118
2119 @node Face Attributes
2120 @subsection Face Attributes
2121 @cindex face attributes
2122
2123 @dfn{Face attributes} determine the visual appearance of a face.
2124 The following table lists all the face attributes, their possible
2125 values, and their effects.
2126
2127 Apart from the values given below, each face attribute can have the
2128 value @code{unspecified}. This special value means that the face
2129 doesn't specify that attribute directly. An @code{unspecified}
2130 attribute tells Emacs to refer instead to a parent face (see the
2131 description @code{:inherit} attribute below); or, failing that, to an
2132 underlying face (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). The @code{default} face
2133 must specify all attributes.
2134
2135 Some of these attributes are meaningful only on certain kinds of
2136 displays. If your display cannot handle a certain attribute, the
2137 attribute is ignored.
2138
2139 @table @code
2140 @item :family
2141 Font family or fontset (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU
2142 Emacs Manual}, for more information about font families. The function
2143 @code{font-family-list} (see below) returns a list of available family
2144 names. @xref{Fontsets}, for information about fontsets.
2145
2146 @item :foundry
2147 The name of the @dfn{font foundry} for the font family specified by
2148 the @code{:family} attribute (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
2149 GNU Emacs Manual}.
2150
2151 @item :width
2152 Relative character width. This should be one of the symbols
2153 @code{ultra-condensed}, @code{extra-condensed}, @code{condensed},
2154 @code{semi-condensed}, @code{normal}, @code{semi-expanded},
2155 @code{expanded}, @code{extra-expanded}, or @code{ultra-expanded}.
2156
2157 @item :height
2158 The height of the font. In the simplest case, this is an integer in
2159 units of 1/10 point.
2160
2161 The value can also be floating point or a function, which
2162 specifies the height relative to an @dfn{underlying face}
2163 (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). A floating-point value
2164 specifies the amount by which to scale the height of the
2165 underlying face. A function value is called
2166 with one argument, the height of the underlying face, and returns the
2167 height of the new face. If the function is passed an integer
2168 argument, it must return an integer.
2169
2170 The height of the default face must be specified using an integer;
2171 floating point and function values are not allowed.
2172
2173 @item :weight
2174 Font weight---one of the symbols (from densest to faintest)
2175 @code{ultra-bold}, @code{extra-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{semi-bold},
2176 @code{normal}, @code{semi-light}, @code{light}, @code{extra-light}, or
2177 @code{ultra-light}. On text terminals which support
2178 variable-brightness text, any weight greater than normal is displayed
2179 as extra bright, and any weight less than normal is displayed as
2180 half-bright.
2181
2182 @cindex italic text
2183 @item :slant
2184 Font slant---one of the symbols @code{italic}, @code{oblique},
2185 @code{normal}, @code{reverse-italic}, or @code{reverse-oblique}. On
2186 text terminals that support variable-brightness text, slanted text is
2187 displayed as half-bright.
2188
2189 @item :foreground
2190 Foreground color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2191 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}. On
2192 black-and-white displays, certain shades of gray are implemented by
2193 stipple patterns.
2194
2195 @item :distant-foreground
2196 Alternative foreground color, a string. This is like @code{:foreground}
2197 but the color is only used as a foreground when the background color is
2198 near to the foreground that would have been used. This is useful for
2199 example when marking text (i.e., the region face). If the text has a foreground
2200 that is visible with the region face, that foreground is used.
2201 If the foreground is near the region face background,
2202 @code{:distant-foreground} is used instead so the text is readable.
2203
2204 @item :background
2205 Background color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2206 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}.
2207
2208 @cindex underlined text
2209 @item :underline
2210 Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what
2211 way. The possible values of the @code{:underline} attribute are:
2212
2213 @table @asis
2214 @item @code{nil}
2215 Don't underline.
2216
2217 @item @code{t}
2218 Underline with the foreground color of the face.
2219
2220 @item @var{color}
2221 Underline in color @var{color}, a string specifying a color.
2222
2223 @item @code{(:color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2224 @var{color} is either a string, or the symbol @code{foreground-color},
2225 meaning the foreground color of the face. Omitting the attribute
2226 @code{:color} means to use the foreground color of the face.
2227 @var{style} should be a symbol @code{line} or @code{wave}, meaning to
2228 use a straight or wavy line. Omitting the attribute @code{:style}
2229 means to use a straight line.
2230 @end table
2231
2232 @cindex overlined text
2233 @item :overline
2234 Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2235 If the value is @code{t}, overlining uses the foreground color of the
2236 face. If the value is a string, overlining uses that color. The
2237 value @code{nil} means do not overline.
2238
2239 @cindex strike-through text
2240 @item :strike-through
2241 Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2242 color. The value is used like that of @code{:overline}.
2243
2244 @cindex 2D box
2245 @cindex 3D box
2246 @item :box
2247 Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its color, the
2248 width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. Here are the possible
2249 values of the @code{:box} attribute, and what they mean:
2250
2251 @table @asis
2252 @item @code{nil}
2253 Don't draw a box.
2254
2255 @item @code{t}
2256 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in the foreground color.
2257
2258 @item @var{color}
2259 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in color @var{color}.
2260
2261 @item @code{(:line-width @var{width} :color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2262 This way you can explicitly specify all aspects of the box. The value
2263 @var{width} specifies the width of the lines to draw; it defaults to
2264 1. A negative width @var{-n} means to draw a line of width @var{n}
2265 that occupies the space of the underlying text, thus avoiding any
2266 increase in the character height or width.
2267
2268 The value @var{color} specifies the color to draw with. The default is
2269 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2270 color of the face for 3D boxes.
2271
2272 The value @var{style} specifies whether to draw a 3D box. If it is
2273 @code{released-button}, the box looks like a 3D button that is not being
2274 pressed. If it is @code{pressed-button}, the box looks like a 3D button
2275 that is being pressed. If it is @code{nil} or omitted, a plain 2D box
2276 is used.
2277 @end table
2278
2279 @item :inverse-video
2280 Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. The
2281 value should be @code{t} (yes) or @code{nil} (no).
2282
2283 @item :stipple
2284 The background stipple, a bitmap.
2285
2286 The value can be a string; that should be the name of a file containing
2287 external-format X bitmap data. The file is found in the directories
2288 listed in the variable @code{x-bitmap-file-path}.
2289
2290 Alternatively, the value can specify the bitmap directly, with a list
2291 of the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height} @var{data})}. Here,
2292 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the size in pixels, and
2293 @var{data} is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap, row by
2294 row. Each row occupies @math{(@var{width} + 7) / 8} consecutive bytes
2295 in the string (which should be a unibyte string for best results).
2296 This means that each row always occupies at least one whole byte.
2297
2298 If the value is @code{nil}, that means use no stipple pattern.
2299
2300 Normally you do not need to set the stipple attribute, because it is
2301 used automatically to handle certain shades of gray.
2302
2303 @item :font
2304 The font used to display the face. Its value should be a font object.
2305 @xref{Low-Level Font}, for information about font objects, font specs,
2306 and font entities.
2307
2308 When specifying this attribute using @code{set-face-attribute}
2309 (@pxref{Attribute Functions}), you may also supply a font spec, a font
2310 entity, or a string. Emacs converts such values to an appropriate
2311 font object, and stores that font object as the actual attribute
2312 value. If you specify a string, the contents of the string should be
2313 a font name (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}); if the
2314 font name is an XLFD containing wildcards, Emacs chooses the first
2315 font matching those wildcards. Specifying this attribute also changes
2316 the values of the @code{:family}, @code{:foundry}, @code{:width},
2317 @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant} attributes.
2318
2319 @cindex inheritance, for faces
2320 @item :inherit
2321 The name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list of face
2322 names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face like
2323 an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying
2324 faces (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). If a list of faces is used,
2325 attributes from faces earlier in the list override those from later
2326 faces.
2327 @end table
2328
2329 @defun font-family-list &optional frame
2330 This function returns a list of available font family names. The
2331 optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on which the text is
2332 to be displayed; if it is @code{nil}, the selected frame is used.
2333 @end defun
2334
2335 @defopt underline-minimum-offset
2336 This variable specifies the minimum distance between the baseline and
2337 the underline, in pixels, when displaying underlined text.
2338 @end defopt
2339
2340 @defopt x-bitmap-file-path
2341 This variable specifies a list of directories for searching
2342 for bitmap files, for the @code{:stipple} attribute.
2343 @end defopt
2344
2345 @defun bitmap-spec-p object
2346 This returns @code{t} if @var{object} is a valid bitmap specification,
2347 suitable for use with @code{:stipple} (see above). It returns
2348 @code{nil} otherwise.
2349 @end defun
2350
2351 @node Defining Faces
2352 @subsection Defining Faces
2353 @cindex defining faces
2354
2355 @cindex face spec
2356 The usual way to define a face is through the @code{defface} macro.
2357 This macro associates a face name (a symbol) with a default @dfn{face
2358 spec}. A face spec is a construct which specifies what attributes a
2359 face should have on any given terminal; for example, a face spec might
2360 specify one foreground color on high-color terminals, and a different
2361 foreground color on low-color terminals.
2362
2363 People are sometimes tempted to create a variable whose value is a
2364 face name. In the vast majority of cases, this is not necessary; the
2365 usual procedure is to define a face with @code{defface}, and then use
2366 its name directly.
2367
2368 @defmac defface face spec doc [keyword value]@dots{}
2369 This macro declares @var{face} as a named face whose default face spec
2370 is given by @var{spec}. You should not quote the symbol @var{face},
2371 and it should not end in @samp{-face} (that would be redundant). The
2372 argument @var{doc} is a documentation string for the face. The
2373 additional @var{keyword} arguments have the same meanings as in
2374 @code{defgroup} and @code{defcustom} (@pxref{Common Keywords}).
2375
2376 If @var{face} already has a default face spec, this macro does
2377 nothing.
2378
2379 The default face spec determines @var{face}'s appearance when no
2380 customizations are in effect (@pxref{Customization}). If @var{face}
2381 has already been customized (via Custom themes or via customizations
2382 read from the init file), its appearance is determined by the custom
2383 face spec(s), which override the default face spec @var{spec}.
2384 However, if the customizations are subsequently removed, the
2385 appearance of @var{face} will again be determined by its default face
2386 spec.
2387
2388 As an exception, if you evaluate a @code{defface} form with
2389 @kbd{C-M-x} in Emacs Lisp mode (@code{eval-defun}), a special feature
2390 of @code{eval-defun} overrides any custom face specs on the face,
2391 causing the face to reflect exactly what the @code{defface} says.
2392
2393 The @var{spec} argument is a @dfn{face spec}, which states how the
2394 face should appear on different kinds of terminals. It should be an
2395 alist whose elements each have the form
2396
2397 @example
2398 (@var{display} . @var{plist})
2399 @end example
2400
2401 @noindent
2402 @var{display} specifies a class of terminals (see below). @var{plist}
2403 is a property list of face attributes and their values, specifying how
2404 the face appears on such terminals. For backward compatibility, you
2405 can also write an element as @code{(@var{display} @var{plist})}.
2406
2407 The @var{display} part of an element of @var{spec} determines which
2408 terminals the element matches. If more than one element of @var{spec}
2409 matches a given terminal, the first element that matches is the one
2410 used for that terminal. There are three possibilities for
2411 @var{display}:
2412
2413 @table @asis
2414 @item @code{default}
2415 This element of @var{spec} doesn't match any terminal; instead, it
2416 specifies defaults that apply to all terminals. This element, if
2417 used, must be the first element of @var{spec}. Each of the following
2418 elements can override any or all of these defaults.
2419
2420 @item @code{t}
2421 This element of @var{spec} matches all terminals. Therefore, any
2422 subsequent elements of @var{spec} are never used. Normally @code{t}
2423 is used in the last (or only) element of @var{spec}.
2424
2425 @item a list
2426 If @var{display} is a list, each element should have the form
2427 @code{(@var{characteristic} @var{value}@dots{})}. Here
2428 @var{characteristic} specifies a way of classifying terminals, and the
2429 @var{value}s are possible classifications which @var{display} should
2430 apply to. Here are the possible values of @var{characteristic}:
2431
2432 @table @code
2433 @item type
2434 The kind of window system the terminal uses---either @code{graphic}
2435 (any graphics-capable display), @code{x}, @code{pc} (for the MS-DOS
2436 console), @code{w32} (for MS Windows 9X/NT/2K/XP), or @code{tty} (a
2437 non-graphics-capable display). @xref{Window Systems, window-system}.
2438
2439 @item class
2440 What kinds of colors the terminal supports---either @code{color},
2441 @code{grayscale}, or @code{mono}.
2442
2443 @item background
2444 The kind of background---either @code{light} or @code{dark}.
2445
2446 @item min-colors
2447 An integer that represents the minimum number of colors the terminal
2448 should support. This matches a terminal if its
2449 @code{display-color-cells} value is at least the specified integer.
2450
2451 @item supports
2452 Whether or not the terminal can display the face attributes given in
2453 @var{value}@dots{} (@pxref{Face Attributes}). @xref{Display Face
2454 Attribute Testing}, for more information on exactly how this testing
2455 is done.
2456 @end table
2457
2458 If an element of @var{display} specifies more than one @var{value} for
2459 a given @var{characteristic}, any of those values is acceptable. If
2460 @var{display} has more than one element, each element should specify a
2461 different @var{characteristic}; then @emph{each} characteristic of the
2462 terminal must match one of the @var{value}s specified for it in
2463 @var{display}.
2464 @end table
2465 @end defmac
2466
2467 For example, here's the definition of the standard face
2468 @code{highlight}:
2469
2470 @example
2471 (defface highlight
2472 '((((class color) (min-colors 88) (background light))
2473 :background "darkseagreen2")
2474 (((class color) (min-colors 88) (background dark))
2475 :background "darkolivegreen")
2476 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background light))
2477 :background "darkseagreen2")
2478 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background dark))
2479 :background "darkolivegreen")
2480 (((class color) (min-colors 8))
2481 :background "green" :foreground "black")
2482 (t :inverse-video t))
2483 "Basic face for highlighting."
2484 :group 'basic-faces)
2485 @end example
2486
2487 Internally, Emacs stores each face's default spec in its
2488 @code{face-defface-spec} symbol property (@pxref{Symbol Properties}).
2489 The @code{saved-face} property stores any face spec saved by the user
2490 using the customization buffer; the @code{customized-face} property
2491 stores the face spec customized for the current session, but not
2492 saved; and the @code{theme-face} property stores an alist associating
2493 the active customization settings and Custom themes with the face
2494 specs for that face. The face's documentation string is stored in the
2495 @code{face-documentation} property.
2496
2497 Normally, a face is declared just once, using @code{defface}, and
2498 any further changes to its appearance are applied using the Customize
2499 framework (e.g., via the Customize user interface or via the
2500 @code{custom-set-faces} function; @pxref{Applying Customizations}), or
2501 by face remapping (@pxref{Face Remapping}). In the rare event that
2502 you need to change a face spec directly from Lisp, you can use the
2503 @code{face-spec-set} function.
2504
2505 @defun face-spec-set face spec &optional spec-type
2506 This function applies @var{spec} as a face spec for @code{face}.
2507 @var{spec} should be a face spec, as described in the above
2508 documentation for @code{defface}.
2509
2510 This function also defines @var{face} as a valid face name if it is
2511 not already one, and (re)calculates its attributes on existing frames.
2512
2513 @cindex override spec @r{(for a face)}
2514 The argument @var{spec-type} determines which spec to set. If it is
2515 @code{nil} or @code{face-override-spec}, this function sets the
2516 @dfn{override spec}, which overrides over all other face specs on
2517 @var{face}. If it is @code{customized-face} or @code{saved-face},
2518 this function sets the customized spec or the saved custom spec. If
2519 it is @code{face-defface-spec}, this function sets the default face
2520 spec (the same one set by @code{defface}). If it is @code{reset},
2521 this function clears out all customization specs and override specs
2522 from @var{face} (in this case, the value of @var{spec} is ignored).
2523 Any other value of @var{spec-type} is reserved for internal use.
2524 @end defun
2525
2526 @node Attribute Functions
2527 @subsection Face Attribute Functions
2528 @cindex face attributes, access and modification
2529
2530 This section describes functions for directly accessing and
2531 modifying the attributes of a named face.
2532
2533 @defun face-attribute face attribute &optional frame inherit
2534 This function returns the value of the @var{attribute} attribute for
2535 @var{face} on @var{frame}.
2536
2537 If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, that means the selected frame
2538 (@pxref{Input Focus}). If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function
2539 returns the value of the specified attribute for newly-created frames
2540 (this is normally @code{unspecified}, unless you have specified some
2541 value using @code{set-face-attribute}; see below).
2542
2543 If @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only attributes directly defined by
2544 @var{face} are considered, so the return value may be
2545 @code{unspecified}, or a relative value. If @var{inherit} is
2546 non-@code{nil}, @var{face}'s definition of @var{attribute} is merged
2547 with the faces specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute; however the
2548 return value may still be @code{unspecified} or relative. If
2549 @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then the result is further
2550 merged with that face (or faces), until it becomes specified and
2551 absolute.
2552
2553 To ensure that the return value is always specified and absolute, use
2554 a value of @code{default} for @var{inherit}; this will resolve any
2555 unspecified or relative values by merging with the @code{default} face
2556 (which is always completely specified).
2557
2558 For example,
2559
2560 @example
2561 (face-attribute 'bold :weight)
2562 @result{} bold
2563 @end example
2564 @end defun
2565
2566 @c FIXME: Add an index for "relative face attribute", maybe here? --xfq
2567 @defun face-attribute-relative-p attribute value
2568 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{value}, when used as the
2569 value of the face attribute @var{attribute}, is relative. This means
2570 it would modify, rather than completely override, any value that comes
2571 from a subsequent face in the face list or that is inherited from
2572 another face.
2573
2574 @code{unspecified} is a relative value for all attributes. For
2575 @code{:height}, floating point and function values are also relative.
2576
2577 For example:
2578
2579 @example
2580 (face-attribute-relative-p :height 2.0)
2581 @result{} t
2582 @end example
2583 @end defun
2584
2585 @defun face-all-attributes face &optional frame
2586 This function returns an alist of attributes of @var{face}. The
2587 elements of the result are name-value pairs of the form
2588 @w{@code{(@var{attr-name} . @var{attr-value})}}. Optional argument
2589 @var{frame} specifies the frame whose definition of @var{face} to
2590 return; if omitted or @code{nil}, the returned value describes the
2591 default attributes of @var{face} for newly created frames.
2592 @end defun
2593
2594 @defun merge-face-attribute attribute value1 value2
2595 If @var{value1} is a relative value for the face attribute
2596 @var{attribute}, returns it merged with the underlying value
2597 @var{value2}; otherwise, if @var{value1} is an absolute value for the
2598 face attribute @var{attribute}, returns @var{value1} unchanged.
2599 @end defun
2600
2601 Normally, Emacs uses the face specs of each face to automatically
2602 calculate its attributes on each frame (@pxref{Defining Faces}). The
2603 function @code{set-face-attribute} can override this calculation by
2604 directly assigning attributes to a face, either on a specific frame or
2605 for all frames. This function is mostly intended for internal usage.
2606
2607 @defun set-face-attribute face frame &rest arguments
2608 This function sets one or more attributes of @var{face} for
2609 @var{frame}. The attributes specifies in this way override the face
2610 spec(s) belonging to @var{face}.
2611
2612 The extra arguments @var{arguments} specify the attributes to set, and
2613 the values for them. They should consist of alternating attribute
2614 names (such as @code{:family} or @code{:underline}) and values. Thus,
2615
2616 @example
2617 (set-face-attribute 'foo nil :weight 'bold :slant 'italic)
2618 @end example
2619
2620 @noindent
2621 sets the attribute @code{:weight} to @code{bold} and the attribute
2622 @code{:slant} to @code{italic}.
2623
2624
2625 If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function sets the default attributes
2626 for newly created frames. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, this function
2627 sets the attributes for all existing frames, as well as for newly
2628 created frames.
2629 @end defun
2630
2631 The following commands and functions mostly provide compatibility
2632 with old versions of Emacs. They work by calling
2633 @code{set-face-attribute}. Values of @code{t} and @code{nil} for
2634 their @var{frame} argument are handled just like
2635 @code{set-face-attribute} and @code{face-attribute}. The commands
2636 read their arguments using the minibuffer, if called interactively.
2637
2638 @deffn Command set-face-foreground face color &optional frame
2639 @deffnx Command set-face-background face color &optional frame
2640 These set the @code{:foreground} attribute (or @code{:background}
2641 attribute, respectively) of @var{face} to @var{color}.
2642 @end deffn
2643
2644 @deffn Command set-face-stipple face pattern &optional frame
2645 This sets the @code{:stipple} attribute of @var{face} to
2646 @var{pattern}.
2647 @end deffn
2648
2649 @deffn Command set-face-font face font &optional frame
2650 This sets the @code{:font} attribute of @var{face} to @var{font}.
2651 @end deffn
2652
2653 @defun set-face-bold face bold-p &optional frame
2654 This sets the @code{:weight} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal}
2655 if @var{bold-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{bold} otherwise.
2656 @end defun
2657
2658 @defun set-face-italic face italic-p &optional frame
2659 This sets the @code{:slant} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal} if
2660 @var{italic-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{italic} otherwise.
2661 @end defun
2662
2663 @defun set-face-underline face underline &optional frame
2664 This sets the @code{:underline} attribute of @var{face} to
2665 @var{underline}.
2666 @end defun
2667
2668 @defun set-face-inverse-video face inverse-video-p &optional frame
2669 This sets the @code{:inverse-video} attribute of @var{face} to
2670 @var{inverse-video-p}.
2671 @end defun
2672
2673 @deffn Command invert-face face &optional frame
2674 This swaps the foreground and background colors of face @var{face}.
2675 @end deffn
2676
2677 The following functions examine the attributes of a face. They
2678 mostly provide compatibility with old versions of Emacs. If you don't
2679 specify @var{frame}, they refer to the selected frame; @code{t} refers
2680 to the default data for new frames. They return @code{unspecified} if
2681 the face doesn't define any value for that attribute. If
2682 @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only an attribute directly defined by the
2683 face is returned. If @var{inherit} is non-@code{nil}, any faces
2684 specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute are considered as well, and
2685 if @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then they are also
2686 considered, until a specified attribute is found. To ensure that the
2687 return value is always specified, use a value of @code{default} for
2688 @var{inherit}.
2689
2690 @defun face-font face &optional frame character
2691 This function returns the name of the font of face @var{face}.
2692
2693 If the optional argument @var{frame} is specified, it returns the name
2694 of the font of @var{face} for that frame. If @var{frame} is omitted or
2695 @code{nil}, the selected frame is used. And, in this case, if the
2696 optional third argument @var{character} is supplied, it returns the font
2697 name used for @var{character}.
2698 @end defun
2699
2700 @defun face-foreground face &optional frame inherit
2701 @defunx face-background face &optional frame inherit
2702 These functions return the foreground color (or background color,
2703 respectively) of face @var{face}, as a string.
2704 @end defun
2705
2706 @defun face-stipple face &optional frame inherit
2707 This function returns the name of the background stipple pattern of face
2708 @var{face}, or @code{nil} if it doesn't have one.
2709 @end defun
2710
2711 @defun face-bold-p face &optional frame inherit
2712 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:weight}
2713 attribute of @var{face} is bolder than normal (i.e., one of
2714 @code{semi-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{extra-bold}, or
2715 @code{ultra-bold}). Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2716 @end defun
2717
2718 @defun face-italic-p face &optional frame inherit
2719 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:slant}
2720 attribute of @var{face} is @code{italic} or @code{oblique}, and
2721 @code{nil} otherwise.
2722 @end defun
2723
2724 @defun face-underline-p face &optional frame inherit
2725 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2726 a non-@code{nil} @code{:underline} attribute.
2727 @end defun
2728
2729 @defun face-inverse-video-p face &optional frame inherit
2730 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2731 a non-@code{nil} @code{:inverse-video} attribute.
2732 @end defun
2733
2734 @node Displaying Faces
2735 @subsection Displaying Faces
2736 @cindex displaying faces
2737 @cindex face merging
2738
2739 When Emacs displays a given piece of text, the visual appearance of
2740 the text may be determined by faces drawn from different sources. If
2741 these various sources together specify more than one face for a
2742 particular character, Emacs merges the attributes of the various
2743 faces. Here is the order in which Emacs merges the faces, from
2744 highest to lowest priority:
2745
2746 @itemize @bullet
2747 @item
2748 If the text consists of a special glyph, the glyph can specify a
2749 particular face. @xref{Glyphs}.
2750
2751 @item
2752 If the text lies within an active region, Emacs highlights it using
2753 the @code{region} face. @xref{Standard Faces,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
2754 Manual}.
2755
2756 @item
2757 If the text lies within an overlay with a non-@code{nil} @code{face}
2758 property, Emacs applies the face(s) specified by that property. If
2759 the overlay has a @code{mouse-face} property and the mouse is near
2760 enough to the overlay, Emacs applies the face or face attributes
2761 specified by the @code{mouse-face} property instead. @xref{Overlay
2762 Properties}.
2763
2764 When multiple overlays cover one character, an overlay with higher
2765 priority overrides those with lower priority. @xref{Overlays}.
2766
2767 @item
2768 If the text contains a @code{face} or @code{mouse-face} property,
2769 Emacs applies the specified faces and face attributes. @xref{Special
2770 Properties}. (This is how Font Lock mode faces are applied.
2771 @xref{Font Lock Mode}.)
2772
2773 @item
2774 If the text lies within the mode line of the selected window, Emacs
2775 applies the @code{mode-line} face. For the mode line of a
2776 non-selected window, Emacs applies the @code{mode-line-inactive} face.
2777 For a header line, Emacs applies the @code{header-line} face.
2778
2779 @item
2780 If any given attribute has not been specified during the preceding
2781 steps, Emacs applies the attribute of the @code{default} face.
2782 @end itemize
2783
2784 At each stage, if a face has a valid @code{:inherit} attribute,
2785 Emacs treats any attribute with an @code{unspecified} value as having
2786 the corresponding value drawn from the parent face(s). @pxref{Face
2787 Attributes}. Note that the parent face(s) may also leave the
2788 attribute unspecified; in that case, the attribute remains unspecified
2789 at the next level of face merging.
2790
2791 @node Face Remapping
2792 @subsection Face Remapping
2793 @cindex face remapping
2794
2795 The variable @code{face-remapping-alist} is used for buffer-local or
2796 global changes in the appearance of a face. For instance, it is used
2797 to implement the @code{text-scale-adjust} command (@pxref{Text
2798 Scale,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
2799
2800 @defvar face-remapping-alist
2801 The value of this variable is an alist whose elements have the form
2802 @code{(@var{face} . @var{remapping})}. This causes Emacs to display
2803 any text having the face @var{face} with @var{remapping}, rather than
2804 the ordinary definition of @var{face}.
2805
2806 @var{remapping} may be any face spec suitable for a @code{face} text
2807 property: either a face (i.e., a face name or a property list of
2808 attribute/value pairs), or a list of faces. For details, see the
2809 description of the @code{face} text property in @ref{Special
2810 Properties}. @var{remapping} serves as the complete specification for
2811 the remapped face---it replaces the normal definition of @var{face},
2812 instead of modifying it.
2813
2814 If @code{face-remapping-alist} is buffer-local, its local value takes
2815 effect only within that buffer.
2816
2817 Note: face remapping is non-recursive. If @var{remapping} references
2818 the same face name @var{face}, either directly or via the
2819 @code{:inherit} attribute of some other face in @var{remapping}, that
2820 reference uses the normal definition of @var{face}. For instance, if
2821 the @code{mode-line} face is remapped using this entry in
2822 @code{face-remapping-alist}:
2823
2824 @example
2825 (mode-line italic mode-line)
2826 @end example
2827
2828 @noindent
2829 then the new definition of the @code{mode-line} face inherits from the
2830 @code{italic} face, and the @emph{normal} (non-remapped) definition of
2831 @code{mode-line} face.
2832 @end defvar
2833
2834 @cindex relative remapping, faces
2835 @cindex base remapping, faces
2836 The following functions implement a higher-level interface to
2837 @code{face-remapping-alist}. Most Lisp code should use these
2838 functions instead of setting @code{face-remapping-alist} directly, to
2839 avoid trampling on remappings applied elsewhere. These functions are
2840 intended for buffer-local remappings, so they all make
2841 @code{face-remapping-alist} buffer-local as a side-effect. They manage
2842 @code{face-remapping-alist} entries of the form
2843
2844 @example
2845 (@var{face} @var{relative-spec-1} @var{relative-spec-2} @var{...} @var{base-spec})
2846 @end example
2847
2848 @noindent
2849 where, as explained above, each of the @var{relative-spec-N} and
2850 @var{base-spec} is either a face name, or a property list of
2851 attribute/value pairs. Each of the @dfn{relative remapping} entries,
2852 @var{relative-spec-N}, is managed by the
2853 @code{face-remap-add-relative} and @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2854 functions; these are intended for simple modifications like changing
2855 the text size. The @dfn{base remapping} entry, @var{base-spec}, has
2856 the lowest priority and is managed by the @code{face-remap-set-base}
2857 and @code{face-remap-reset-base} functions; it is intended for major
2858 modes to remap faces in the buffers they control.
2859
2860 @defun face-remap-add-relative face &rest specs
2861 This function adds the face spec in @var{specs} as relative
2862 remappings for face @var{face} in the current buffer. The remaining
2863 arguments, @var{specs}, should form either a list of face names, or a
2864 property list of attribute/value pairs.
2865
2866 The return value is a Lisp object that serves as a cookie; you can
2867 pass this object as an argument to @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2868 if you need to remove the remapping later.
2869
2870 @example
2871 ;; Remap the 'escape-glyph' face into a combination
2872 ;; of the 'highlight' and 'italic' faces:
2873 (face-remap-add-relative 'escape-glyph 'highlight 'italic)
2874
2875 ;; Increase the size of the 'default' face by 50%:
2876 (face-remap-add-relative 'default :height 1.5)
2877 @end example
2878 @end defun
2879
2880 @defun face-remap-remove-relative cookie
2881 This function removes a relative remapping previously added by
2882 @code{face-remap-add-relative}. @var{cookie} should be the Lisp
2883 object returned by @code{face-remap-add-relative} when the remapping
2884 was added.
2885 @end defun
2886
2887 @defun face-remap-set-base face &rest specs
2888 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} in the current
2889 buffer to @var{specs}. If @var{specs} is empty, the default base
2890 remapping is restored, similar to calling @code{face-remap-reset-base}
2891 (see below); note that this is different from @var{specs} containing a
2892 single value @code{nil}, which has the opposite result (the global
2893 definition of @var{face} is ignored).
2894
2895 This overwrites the default @var{base-spec}, which inherits the global
2896 face definition, so it is up to the caller to add such inheritance if
2897 so desired.
2898 @end defun
2899
2900 @defun face-remap-reset-base face
2901 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} to its default
2902 value, which inherits from @var{face}'s global definition.
2903 @end defun
2904
2905 @node Face Functions
2906 @subsection Functions for Working with Faces
2907
2908 Here are additional functions for creating and working with faces.
2909
2910 @defun face-list
2911 This function returns a list of all defined face names.
2912 @end defun
2913
2914 @defun face-id face
2915 This function returns the @dfn{face number} of face @var{face}. This
2916 is a number that uniquely identifies a face at low levels within
2917 Emacs. It is seldom necessary to refer to a face by its face number.
2918 @end defun
2919
2920 @defun face-documentation face
2921 This function returns the documentation string of face @var{face}, or
2922 @code{nil} if none was specified for it.
2923 @end defun
2924
2925 @defun face-equal face1 face2 &optional frame
2926 This returns @code{t} if the faces @var{face1} and @var{face2} have the
2927 same attributes for display.
2928 @end defun
2929
2930 @defun face-differs-from-default-p face &optional frame
2931 This returns non-@code{nil} if the face @var{face} displays
2932 differently from the default face.
2933 @end defun
2934
2935 @cindex face alias
2936 @cindex alias, for faces
2937 A @dfn{face alias} provides an equivalent name for a face. You can
2938 define a face alias by giving the alias symbol the @code{face-alias}
2939 property, with a value of the target face name. The following example
2940 makes @code{modeline} an alias for the @code{mode-line} face.
2941
2942 @example
2943 (put 'modeline 'face-alias 'mode-line)
2944 @end example
2945
2946 @defmac define-obsolete-face-alias obsolete-face current-face when
2947 This macro defines @code{obsolete-face} as an alias for
2948 @var{current-face}, and also marks it as obsolete, indicating that it
2949 may be removed in future. @var{when} should be a string indicating
2950 when @code{obsolete-face} was made obsolete (usually a version number
2951 string).
2952 @end defmac
2953
2954 @node Auto Faces
2955 @subsection Automatic Face Assignment
2956 @cindex automatic face assignment
2957 @cindex faces, automatic choice
2958
2959 This hook is used for automatically assigning faces to text in the
2960 buffer. It is part of the implementation of Jit-Lock mode, used by
2961 Font-Lock.
2962
2963 @defvar fontification-functions
2964 This variable holds a list of functions that are called by Emacs
2965 redisplay as needed, just before doing redisplay. They are called even
2966 when Font Lock Mode isn't enabled. When Font Lock Mode is enabled, this
2967 variable usually holds just one function, @code{jit-lock-function}.
2968
2969 The functions are called in the order listed, with one argument, a
2970 buffer position @var{pos}. Collectively they should attempt to assign
2971 faces to the text in the current buffer starting at @var{pos}.
2972
2973 The functions should record the faces they assign by setting the
2974 @code{face} property. They should also add a non-@code{nil}
2975 @code{fontified} property to all the text they have assigned faces to.
2976 That property tells redisplay that faces have been assigned to that text
2977 already.
2978
2979 It is probably a good idea for the functions to do nothing if the
2980 character after @var{pos} already has a non-@code{nil} @code{fontified}
2981 property, but this is not required. If one function overrides the
2982 assignments made by a previous one, the properties after the last
2983 function finishes are the ones that really matter.
2984
2985 For efficiency, we recommend writing these functions so that they
2986 usually assign faces to around 400 to 600 characters at each call.
2987 @end defvar
2988
2989 @node Basic Faces
2990 @subsection Basic Faces
2991 @cindex basic faces
2992
2993 If your Emacs Lisp program needs to assign some faces to text, it is
2994 often a good idea to use certain existing faces or inherit from them,
2995 rather than defining entirely new faces. This way, if other users
2996 have customized the basic faces to give Emacs a certain look, your
2997 program will fit in without additional customization.
2998
2999 Some of the basic faces defined in Emacs are listed below. In
3000 addition to these, you might want to make use of the Font Lock faces
3001 for syntactic highlighting, if highlighting is not already handled by
3002 Font Lock mode, or if some Font Lock faces are not in use.
3003 @xref{Faces for Font Lock}.
3004
3005 @table @code
3006 @item default
3007 The default face, whose attributes are all specified. All other faces
3008 implicitly inherit from it: any unspecified attribute defaults to the
3009 attribute on this face (@pxref{Face Attributes}).
3010
3011 @item bold
3012 @itemx italic
3013 @itemx bold-italic
3014 @itemx underline
3015 @itemx fixed-pitch
3016 @itemx variable-pitch
3017 These have the attributes indicated by their names (e.g., @code{bold}
3018 has a bold @code{:weight} attribute), with all other attributes
3019 unspecified (and so given by @code{default}).
3020
3021 @item shadow
3022 For dimmed-out text. For example, it is used for the ignored
3023 part of a filename in the minibuffer (@pxref{Minibuffer File,,
3024 Minibuffers for File Names, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
3025
3026 @item link
3027 @itemx link-visited
3028 For clickable text buttons that send the user to a different
3029 buffer or location.
3030
3031 @item highlight
3032 For stretches of text that should temporarily stand out. For example,
3033 it is commonly assigned to the @code{mouse-face} property for cursor
3034 highlighting (@pxref{Special Properties}).
3035
3036 @item match
3037 For text matching a search command.
3038
3039 @item error
3040 @itemx warning
3041 @itemx success
3042 For text concerning errors, warnings, or successes. For example,
3043 these are used for messages in @file{*Compilation*} buffers.
3044 @end table
3045
3046 @node Font Selection
3047 @subsection Font Selection
3048 @cindex font selection
3049 @cindex selecting a font
3050
3051 Before Emacs can draw a character on a graphical display, it must
3052 select a @dfn{font} for that character@footnote{In this context, the
3053 term @dfn{font} has nothing to do with Font Lock (@pxref{Font Lock
3054 Mode}).}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. Normally,
3055 Emacs automatically chooses a font based on the faces assigned to that
3056 character---specifically, the face attributes @code{:family},
3057 @code{:weight}, @code{:slant}, and @code{:width} (@pxref{Face
3058 Attributes}). The choice of font also depends on the character to be
3059 displayed; some fonts can only display a limited set of characters.
3060 If no available font exactly fits the requirements, Emacs looks for
3061 the @dfn{closest matching font}. The variables in this section
3062 control how Emacs makes this selection.
3063
3064 @defopt face-font-family-alternatives
3065 If a given family is specified but does not exist, this variable
3066 specifies alternative font families to try. Each element should have
3067 this form:
3068
3069 @example
3070 (@var{family} @var{alternate-families}@dots{})
3071 @end example
3072
3073 If @var{family} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the other
3074 families given in @var{alternate-families}, one by one, until it finds a
3075 family that does exist.
3076 @end defopt
3077
3078 @defopt face-font-selection-order
3079 If there is no font that exactly matches all desired face attributes
3080 (@code{:width}, @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}),
3081 this variable specifies the order in which these attributes should be
3082 considered when selecting the closest matching font. The value should
3083 be a list containing those four attribute symbols, in order of
3084 decreasing importance. The default is @code{(:width :height :weight
3085 :slant)}.
3086
3087 Font selection first finds the best available matches for the first
3088 attribute in the list; then, among the fonts which are best in that
3089 way, it searches for the best matches in the second attribute, and so
3090 on.
3091
3092 The attributes @code{:weight} and @code{:width} have symbolic values in
3093 a range centered around @code{normal}. Matches that are more extreme
3094 (farther from @code{normal}) are somewhat preferred to matches that are
3095 less extreme (closer to @code{normal}); this is designed to ensure that
3096 non-normal faces contrast with normal ones, whenever possible.
3097
3098 One example of a case where this variable makes a difference is when the
3099 default font has no italic equivalent. With the default ordering, the
3100 @code{italic} face will use a non-italic font that is similar to the
3101 default one. But if you put @code{:slant} before @code{:height}, the
3102 @code{italic} face will use an italic font, even if its height is not
3103 quite right.
3104 @end defopt
3105
3106 @defopt face-font-registry-alternatives
3107 This variable lets you specify alternative font registries to try, if a
3108 given registry is specified and doesn't exist. Each element should have
3109 this form:
3110
3111 @example
3112 (@var{registry} @var{alternate-registries}@dots{})
3113 @end example
3114
3115 If @var{registry} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the
3116 other registries given in @var{alternate-registries}, one by one,
3117 until it finds a registry that does exist.
3118 @end defopt
3119
3120 @cindex scalable fonts
3121 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts, but by default it does not use
3122 them.
3123
3124 @defopt scalable-fonts-allowed
3125 This variable controls which scalable fonts to use. A value of
3126 @code{nil}, the default, means do not use scalable fonts. @code{t}
3127 means to use any scalable font that seems appropriate for the text.
3128
3129 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. Then a
3130 scalable font is enabled for use if its name matches any regular
3131 expression in the list. For example,
3132
3133 @example
3134 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("iso10646-1$"))
3135 @end example
3136
3137 @noindent
3138 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry @code{iso10646-1}.
3139 @end defopt
3140
3141 @defvar face-font-rescale-alist
3142 This variable specifies scaling for certain faces. Its value should
3143 be a list of elements of the form
3144
3145 @example
3146 (@var{fontname-regexp} . @var{scale-factor})
3147 @end example
3148
3149 If @var{fontname-regexp} matches the font name that is about to be
3150 used, this says to choose a larger similar font according to the
3151 factor @var{scale-factor}. You would use this feature to normalize
3152 the font size if certain fonts are bigger or smaller than their
3153 nominal heights and widths would suggest.
3154 @end defvar
3155
3156 @node Font Lookup
3157 @subsection Looking Up Fonts
3158 @cindex font lookup
3159 @cindex looking up fonts
3160
3161 @defun x-list-fonts name &optional reference-face frame maximum width
3162 This function returns a list of available font names that match
3163 @var{name}. @var{name} should be a string containing a font name in
3164 either the Fontconfig, GTK, or XLFD format (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
3165 GNU Emacs Manual}). Within an XLFD string, wildcard characters may be
3166 used: the @samp{*} character matches any substring, and the @samp{?}
3167 character matches any single character. Case is ignored when matching
3168 font names.
3169
3170 If the optional arguments @var{reference-face} and @var{frame} are
3171 specified, the returned list includes only fonts that are the same
3172 size as @var{reference-face} (a face name) currently is on the frame
3173 @var{frame}.
3174
3175 The optional argument @var{maximum} sets a limit on how many fonts to
3176 return. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the return value is truncated
3177 after the first @var{maximum} matching fonts. Specifying a small
3178 value for @var{maximum} can make this function much faster, in cases
3179 where many fonts match the pattern.
3180
3181 The optional argument @var{width} specifies a desired font width. If
3182 it is non-@code{nil}, the function only returns those fonts whose
3183 characters are (on average) @var{width} times as wide as
3184 @var{reference-face}.
3185 @end defun
3186
3187 @defun x-family-fonts &optional family frame
3188 This function returns a list describing the available fonts for family
3189 @var{family} on @var{frame}. If @var{family} is omitted or @code{nil},
3190 this list applies to all families, and therefore, it contains all
3191 available fonts. Otherwise, @var{family} must be a string; it may
3192 contain the wildcards @samp{?} and @samp{*}.
3193
3194 The list describes the display that @var{frame} is on; if @var{frame} is
3195 omitted or @code{nil}, it applies to the selected frame's display
3196 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
3197
3198 Each element in the list is a vector of the following form:
3199
3200 @example
3201 [@var{family} @var{width} @var{point-size} @var{weight} @var{slant}
3202 @var{fixed-p} @var{full} @var{registry-and-encoding}]
3203 @end example
3204
3205 The first five elements correspond to face attributes; if you
3206 specify these attributes for a face, it will use this font.
3207
3208 The last three elements give additional information about the font.
3209 @var{fixed-p} is non-@code{nil} if the font is fixed-pitch.
3210 @var{full} is the full name of the font, and
3211 @var{registry-and-encoding} is a string giving the registry and
3212 encoding of the font.
3213 @end defun
3214
3215 @node Fontsets
3216 @subsection Fontsets
3217 @cindex fontset
3218
3219 A @dfn{fontset} is a list of fonts, each assigned to a range of
3220 character codes. An individual font cannot display the whole range of
3221 characters that Emacs supports, but a fontset can. Fontsets have names,
3222 just as fonts do, and you can use a fontset name in place of a font name
3223 when you specify the font for a frame or a face. Here is
3224 information about defining a fontset under Lisp program control.
3225
3226 @defun create-fontset-from-fontset-spec fontset-spec &optional style-variant-p noerror
3227 This function defines a new fontset according to the specification
3228 string @var{fontset-spec}. The string should have this format:
3229
3230 @smallexample
3231 @var{fontpattern}, @r{[}@var{charset}:@var{font}@r{]@dots{}}
3232 @end smallexample
3233
3234 @noindent
3235 Whitespace characters before and after the commas are ignored.
3236
3237 The first part of the string, @var{fontpattern}, should have the form of
3238 a standard X font name, except that the last two fields should be
3239 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}.
3240
3241 The new fontset has two names, one long and one short. The long name is
3242 @var{fontpattern} in its entirety. The short name is
3243 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}. You can refer to the fontset by either
3244 name. If a fontset with the same name already exists, an error is
3245 signaled, unless @var{noerror} is non-@code{nil}, in which case this
3246 function does nothing.
3247
3248 If optional argument @var{style-variant-p} is non-@code{nil}, that says
3249 to create bold, italic and bold-italic variants of the fontset as well.
3250 These variant fontsets do not have a short name, only a long one, which
3251 is made by altering @var{fontpattern} to indicate the bold and/or italic
3252 status.
3253
3254 The specification string also says which fonts to use in the fontset.
3255 See below for the details.
3256 @end defun
3257
3258 The construct @samp{@var{charset}:@var{font}} specifies which font to
3259 use (in this fontset) for one particular character set. Here,
3260 @var{charset} is the name of a character set, and @var{font} is the font
3261 to use for that character set. You can use this construct any number of
3262 times in the specification string.
3263
3264 For the remaining character sets, those that you don't specify
3265 explicitly, Emacs chooses a font based on @var{fontpattern}: it replaces
3266 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} with a value that names one character set.
3267 For the @acronym{ASCII} character set, @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} is replaced
3268 with @samp{ISO8859-1}.
3269
3270 In addition, when several consecutive fields are wildcards, Emacs
3271 collapses them into a single wildcard. This is to prevent use of
3272 auto-scaled fonts. Fonts made by scaling larger fonts are not usable
3273 for editing, and scaling a smaller font is not useful because it is
3274 better to use the smaller font in its own size, which Emacs does.
3275
3276 Thus if @var{fontpattern} is this,
3277
3278 @example
3279 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
3280 @end example
3281
3282 @noindent
3283 the font specification for @acronym{ASCII} characters would be this:
3284
3285 @example
3286 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
3287 @end example
3288
3289 @noindent
3290 and the font specification for Chinese GB2312 characters would be this:
3291
3292 @example
3293 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3294 @end example
3295
3296 You may not have any Chinese font matching the above font
3297 specification. Most X distributions include only Chinese fonts that
3298 have @samp{song ti} or @samp{fangsong ti} in the @var{family} field. In
3299 such a case, @samp{Fontset-@var{n}} can be specified as below:
3300
3301 @smallexample
3302 Emacs.Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24,\
3303 chinese-gb2312:-*-*-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3304 @end smallexample
3305
3306 @noindent
3307 Then, the font specifications for all but Chinese GB2312 characters have
3308 @samp{fixed} in the @var{family} field, and the font specification for
3309 Chinese GB2312 characters has a wild card @samp{*} in the @var{family}
3310 field.
3311
3312 @defun set-fontset-font name character font-spec &optional frame add
3313 This function modifies the existing fontset @var{name} to use the font
3314 matching with @var{font-spec} for the specified @var{character}.
3315
3316 If @var{name} is @code{nil}, this function modifies the fontset of the
3317 selected frame or that of @var{frame} if @var{frame} is not
3318 @code{nil}.
3319
3320 If @var{name} is @code{t}, this function modifies the default
3321 fontset, whose short name is @samp{fontset-default}.
3322
3323 In addition to specifying a single codepoint, @var{character} may be a
3324 cons @code{(@var{from} . @var{to})}, where @var{from} and @var{to} are
3325 character codepoints. In that case, use @var{font-spec} for all the
3326 characters in the range @var{from} and @var{to} (inclusive).
3327
3328 @var{character} may be a charset. In that case, use
3329 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3330
3331 @var{character} may be a script name. In that case, use
3332 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3333
3334 @var{font-spec} may be a font-spec object created by the function
3335 @code{font-spec} (@pxref{Low-Level Font}).
3336
3337 @var{font-spec} may be a cons; @code{(@var{family} . @var{registry})},
3338 where @var{family} is a family name of a font (possibly including a
3339 foundry name at the head), @var{registry} is a registry name of a font
3340 (possibly including an encoding name at the tail).
3341
3342 @var{font-spec} may be a font name string.
3343
3344 @var{font-spec} may be @code{nil}, which explicitly specifies that
3345 there's no font for the specified @var{character}. This is useful,
3346 for example, to avoid expensive system-wide search for fonts for
3347 characters that have no glyphs, like those from the Unicode Private
3348 Use Area (PUA).
3349
3350 The optional argument @var{add}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies how to
3351 add @var{font-spec} to the font specifications previously set. If it
3352 is @code{prepend}, @var{font-spec} is prepended. If it is
3353 @code{append}, @var{font-spec} is appended. By default,
3354 @var{font-spec} overrides the previous settings.
3355
3356 For instance, this changes the default fontset to use a font of which
3357 family name is @samp{Kochi Gothic} for all characters belonging to
3358 the charset @code{japanese-jisx0208}.
3359
3360 @smallexample
3361 (set-fontset-font t 'japanese-jisx0208
3362 (font-spec :family "Kochi Gothic"))
3363 @end smallexample
3364 @end defun
3365
3366 @defun char-displayable-p char
3367 This function returns @code{t} if Emacs ought to be able to display
3368 @var{char}. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has a
3369 font to display the character set that @var{char} belongs to.
3370
3371 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
3372 does that, this function's value may not be accurate.
3373 @end defun
3374
3375 @node Low-Level Font
3376 @subsection Low-Level Font Representation
3377 @cindex font property
3378
3379 Normally, it is not necessary to manipulate fonts directly. In case
3380 you need to do so, this section explains how.
3381
3382 In Emacs Lisp, fonts are represented using three different Lisp
3383 object types: @dfn{font objects}, @dfn{font specs}, and @dfn{font
3384 entities}.
3385
3386 @defun fontp object &optional type
3387 Return @code{t} if @var{object} is a font object, font spec, or font
3388 entity. Otherwise, return @code{nil}.
3389
3390 The optional argument @var{type}, if non-@code{nil}, determines the
3391 exact type of Lisp object to check for. In that case, @var{type}
3392 should be one of @code{font-object}, @code{font-spec}, or
3393 @code{font-entity}.
3394 @end defun
3395
3396 @cindex font object
3397 A font object is a Lisp object that represents a font that Emacs has
3398 @dfn{opened}. Font objects cannot be modified in Lisp, but they can
3399 be inspected.
3400
3401 @defun font-at position &optional window string
3402 Return the font object that is being used to display the character at
3403 position @var{position} in the window @var{window}. If @var{window}
3404 is @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected window. If @var{string} is
3405 @code{nil}, @var{position} specifies a position in the current buffer;
3406 otherwise, @var{string} should be a string, and @var{position}
3407 specifies a position in that string.
3408 @end defun
3409
3410 @cindex font spec
3411 A font spec is a Lisp object that contains a set of specifications
3412 that can be used to find a font. More than one font may match the
3413 specifications in a font spec.
3414
3415 @defun font-spec &rest arguments
3416 Return a new font spec using the specifications in @var{arguments},
3417 which should come in @code{property}-@code{value} pairs. The possible
3418 specifications are as follows:
3419
3420 @table @code
3421 @item :name
3422 The font name (a string), in either XLFD, Fontconfig, or GTK format.
3423 @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
3424
3425 @item :family
3426 @itemx :foundry
3427 @itemx :weight
3428 @itemx :slant
3429 @itemx :width
3430 These have the same meanings as the face attributes of the same name.
3431 @xref{Face Attributes}.
3432
3433 @item :size
3434 The font size---either a non-negative integer that specifies the pixel
3435 size, or a floating-point number that specifies the point size.
3436
3437 @item :adstyle
3438 Additional typographic style information for the font, such as
3439 @samp{sans}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3440
3441 @cindex font registry
3442 @item :registry
3443 The charset registry and encoding of the font, such as
3444 @samp{iso8859-1}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3445
3446 @item :script
3447 The script that the font must support (a symbol).
3448
3449 @item :lang
3450 The language that the font should support. The value should be a
3451 symbol whose name is a two-letter ISO-639 language name. On X, the
3452 value is matched against the ``Additional Style'' field of the XLFD
3453 name of a font, if it is non-empty. On MS-Windows, fonts matching the
3454 spec are required to support codepages needed for the language.
3455 Currently, only a small set of CJK languages is supported with this
3456 property: @samp{ja}, @samp{ko}, and @samp{zh}.
3457
3458 @item :otf
3459 @cindex OpenType font
3460 The font must be an OpenType font that supports these OpenType
3461 features, provided Emacs is compiled with a library, such as
3462 @samp{libotf} on GNU/Linux, that supports complex text layout for
3463 scripts which need that. The value must be a list of the form
3464
3465 @smallexample
3466 @code{(@var{script-tag} @var{langsys-tag} @var{gsub} @var{gpos})}
3467 @end smallexample
3468
3469 where @var{script-tag} is the OpenType script tag symbol;
3470 @var{langsys-tag} is the OpenType language system tag symbol, or
3471 @code{nil} to use the default language system; @code{gsub} is a list
3472 of OpenType GSUB feature tag symbols, or @code{nil} if none is
3473 required; and @code{gpos} is a list of OpenType GPOS feature tag
3474 symbols, or @code{nil} if none is required. If @code{gsub} or
3475 @code{gpos} is a list, a @code{nil} element in that list means that
3476 the font must not match any of the remaining tag symbols. The
3477 @code{gpos} element may be omitted.
3478 @end table
3479 @end defun
3480
3481 @defun font-put font-spec property value
3482 Set the font property @var{property} in the font-spec @var{font-spec}
3483 to @var{value}.
3484 @end defun
3485
3486 @cindex font entity
3487 A font entity is a reference to a font that need not be open. Its
3488 properties are intermediate between a font object and a font spec:
3489 like a font object, and unlike a font spec, it refers to a single,
3490 specific font. Unlike a font object, creating a font entity does not
3491 load the contents of that font into computer memory. Emacs may open
3492 multiple font objects of different sizes from a single font entity
3493 referring to a scalable font.
3494
3495 @defun find-font font-spec &optional frame
3496 This function returns a font entity that best matches the font spec
3497 @var{font-spec} on frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil},
3498 it defaults to the selected frame.
3499 @end defun
3500
3501 @defun list-fonts font-spec &optional frame num prefer
3502 This function returns a list of all font entities that match the font
3503 spec @var{font-spec}.
3504
3505 The optional argument @var{frame}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
3506 frame on which the fonts are to be displayed. The optional argument
3507 @var{num}, if non-@code{nil}, should be an integer that specifies the
3508 maximum length of the returned list. The optional argument
3509 @var{prefer}, if non-@code{nil}, should be another font spec, which is
3510 used to control the order of the returned list; the returned font
3511 entities are sorted in order of decreasing closeness to that font
3512 spec.
3513 @end defun
3514
3515 If you call @code{set-face-attribute} and pass a font spec, font
3516 entity, or font name string as the value of the @code{:font}
3517 attribute, Emacs opens the best matching font that is available
3518 for display. It then stores the corresponding font object as the
3519 actual value of the @code{:font} attribute for that face.
3520
3521 The following functions can be used to obtain information about a
3522 font. For these functions, the @var{font} argument can be a font
3523 object, a font entity, or a font spec.
3524
3525 @defun font-get font property
3526 This function returns the value of the font property @var{property}
3527 for @var{font}.
3528
3529 If @var{font} is a font spec and the font spec does not specify
3530 @var{property}, the return value is @code{nil}. If @var{font} is a
3531 font object or font entity, the value for the @var{:script} property
3532 may be a list of scripts supported by the font.
3533 @end defun
3534
3535 @defun font-face-attributes font &optional frame
3536 This function returns a list of face attributes corresponding to
3537 @var{font}. The optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on
3538 which the font is to be displayed. If it is @code{nil}, the selected
3539 frame is used. The return value has the form
3540
3541 @smallexample
3542 (:family @var{family} :height @var{height} :weight @var{weight}
3543 :slant @var{slant} :width @var{width})
3544 @end smallexample
3545
3546 where the values of @var{family}, @var{height}, @var{weight},
3547 @var{slant}, and @var{width} are face attribute values. Some of these
3548 key-attribute pairs may be omitted from the list if they are not
3549 specified by @var{font}.
3550 @end defun
3551
3552 @defun font-xlfd-name font &optional fold-wildcards
3553 This function returns the XLFD (X Logical Font Descriptor), a string,
3554 matching @var{font}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
3555 information about XLFDs. If the name is too long for an XLFD (which
3556 can contain at most 255 characters), the function returns @code{nil}.
3557
3558 If the optional argument @var{fold-wildcards} is non-@code{nil},
3559 consecutive wildcards in the XLFD are folded into one.
3560 @end defun
3561
3562 The following two functions return important information about a font.
3563
3564 @defun font-info name &optional frame
3565 This function returns information about a font specified by its
3566 @var{name}, a string, as it is used on @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is
3567 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected frame.
3568
3569 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3570 @code{[@var{opened-name} @var{full-name} @var{size} @var{height}
3571 @var{baseline-offset} @var{relative-compose} @var{default-ascent}
3572 @var{max-width} @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width}
3573 @var{average-width} @var{filename} @var{capability}]}. Here's the
3574 description of each components of this vector:
3575
3576 @table @var
3577 @item opened-name
3578 The name used to open the font, a string.
3579
3580 @item full-name
3581 The full name of the font, a string.
3582
3583 @item size
3584 The pixel size of the font.
3585
3586 @item height
3587 The height of the font in pixels.
3588
3589 @item baseline-offset
3590 The offset in pixels from the @acronym{ASCII} baseline, positive
3591 upward.
3592
3593 @item relative-compose
3594 @itemx default-ascent
3595 Numbers controlling how to compose characters.
3596
3597 @item ascent
3598 @itemx descent
3599 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3600 should be equal to the value of @var{height} above.
3601
3602 @item space-width
3603 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3604
3605 @item average-width
3606 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3607 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3608 on display.
3609
3610 @item filename
3611 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3612 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3613
3614 @item capability
3615 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3616 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3617 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3618 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3619 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3620 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3621 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3622 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3623 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3624 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3625 @end table
3626 @end defun
3627
3628 @defun query-font font-object
3629 This function returns information about a @var{font-object}. (This is
3630 in contrast to @code{font-info}, which takes the font name, a string,
3631 as its argument.)
3632
3633 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3634 @code{[@var{name} @var{filename} @var{pixel-size} @var{max-width}
3635 @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width} @var{average-width}
3636 @var{capability}]}. Here's the description of each components of this
3637 vector:
3638
3639 @table @var
3640 @item name
3641 The font name, a string.
3642
3643 @item filename
3644 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3645 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3646
3647 @item pixel-size
3648 The pixel size of the font used to open the font.
3649
3650 @item max-width
3651 The maximum advance width of the font.
3652
3653 @item ascent
3654 @itemx descent
3655 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3656 gives the font height.
3657
3658 @item space-width
3659 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3660
3661 @item average-width
3662 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3663 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3664 on display.
3665
3666 @item capability
3667 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3668 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3669 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3670 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3671 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3672 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3673 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3674 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3675 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3676 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3677 @end table
3678 @end defun
3679
3680 @cindex font information for layout
3681 The following four functions return size information about fonts used
3682 by various faces, allowing various layout considerations in Lisp
3683 programs. These functions take face remapping into consideration,
3684 returning information about the remapped face, if the face in question
3685 was remapped. @xref{Face Remapping}.
3686
3687 @defun default-font-width
3688 This function returns the average width in pixels of the font used by
3689 the current buffer's default face.
3690 @end defun
3691
3692 @defun default-font-height
3693 This function returns the height in pixels of the font used by the
3694 current buffer's default face.
3695 @end defun
3696
3697 @defun window-font-width &optional window face
3698 This function returns the average width in pixels for the font used by
3699 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3700 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3701 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3702 @var{window}.
3703 @end defun
3704
3705 @defun window-font-height &optional window face
3706 This function returns the height in pixels for the font used by
3707 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3708 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3709 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3710 @var{window}.
3711 @end defun
3712
3713 @node Fringes
3714 @section Fringes
3715 @cindex fringes
3716
3717 On graphical displays, Emacs draws @dfn{fringes} next to each
3718 window: thin vertical strips down the sides which can display bitmaps
3719 indicating truncation, continuation, horizontal scrolling, and so on.
3720
3721 @menu
3722 * Fringe Size/Pos:: Specifying where to put the window fringes.
3723 * Fringe Indicators:: Displaying indicator icons in the window fringes.
3724 * Fringe Cursors:: Displaying cursors in the right fringe.
3725 * Fringe Bitmaps:: Specifying bitmaps for fringe indicators.
3726 * Customizing Bitmaps:: Specifying your own bitmaps to use in the fringes.
3727 * Overlay Arrow:: Display of an arrow to indicate position.
3728 @end menu
3729
3730 @node Fringe Size/Pos
3731 @subsection Fringe Size and Position
3732
3733 The following buffer-local variables control the position and width
3734 of fringes in windows showing that buffer.
3735
3736 @defvar fringes-outside-margins
3737 The fringes normally appear between the display margins and the window
3738 text. If the value is non-@code{nil}, they appear outside the display
3739 margins. @xref{Display Margins}.
3740 @end defvar
3741
3742 @defvar left-fringe-width
3743 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the left
3744 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the left fringe
3745 width from the window's frame.
3746 @end defvar
3747
3748 @defvar right-fringe-width
3749 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the right
3750 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the right fringe
3751 width from the window's frame.
3752 @end defvar
3753
3754 Any buffer which does not specify values for these variables uses
3755 the values specified by the @code{left-fringe} and @code{right-fringe}
3756 frame parameters (@pxref{Layout Parameters}).
3757
3758 The above variables actually take effect via the function
3759 @code{set-window-buffer} (@pxref{Buffers and Windows}), which calls
3760 @code{set-window-fringes} as a subroutine. If you change one of these
3761 variables, the fringe display is not updated in existing windows
3762 showing the buffer, unless you call @code{set-window-buffer} again in
3763 each affected window. You can also use @code{set-window-fringes} to
3764 control the fringe display in individual windows.
3765
3766 @defun set-window-fringes window left &optional right outside-margins
3767 This function sets the fringe widths of window @var{window}.
3768 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
3769
3770 The argument @var{left} specifies the width in pixels of the left
3771 fringe, and likewise @var{right} for the right fringe. A value of
3772 @code{nil} for either one stands for the default width. If
3773 @var{outside-margins} is non-@code{nil}, that specifies that fringes
3774 should appear outside of the display margins.
3775 @end defun
3776
3777 @defun window-fringes &optional window
3778 This function returns information about the fringes of a window
3779 @var{window}. If @var{window} is omitted or @code{nil}, the selected
3780 window is used. The value has the form @code{(@var{left-width}
3781 @var{right-width} @var{outside-margins})}.
3782 @end defun
3783
3784
3785 @node Fringe Indicators
3786 @subsection Fringe Indicators
3787 @cindex fringe indicators
3788 @cindex indicators, fringe
3789
3790 @dfn{Fringe indicators} are tiny icons displayed in the window
3791 fringe to indicate truncated or continued lines, buffer boundaries,
3792 etc.
3793
3794 @defopt indicate-empty-lines
3795 @cindex fringes, and empty line indication
3796 @cindex empty lines, indicating
3797 When this is non-@code{nil}, Emacs displays a special glyph in the
3798 fringe of each empty line at the end of the buffer, on graphical
3799 displays. @xref{Fringes}. This variable is automatically
3800 buffer-local in every buffer.
3801 @end defopt
3802
3803 @defopt indicate-buffer-boundaries
3804 @cindex buffer boundaries, indicating
3805 This buffer-local variable controls how the buffer boundaries and
3806 window scrolling are indicated in the window fringes.
3807
3808 Emacs can indicate the buffer boundaries---that is, the first and last
3809 line in the buffer---with angle icons when they appear on the screen.
3810 In addition, Emacs can display an up-arrow in the fringe to show
3811 that there is text above the screen, and a down-arrow to show
3812 there is text below the screen.
3813
3814 There are three kinds of basic values:
3815
3816 @table @asis
3817 @item @code{nil}
3818 Don't display any of these fringe icons.
3819 @item @code{left}
3820 Display the angle icons and arrows in the left fringe.
3821 @item @code{right}
3822 Display the angle icons and arrows in the right fringe.
3823 @item any non-alist
3824 Display the angle icons in the left fringe
3825 and don't display the arrows.
3826 @end table
3827
3828 Otherwise the value should be an alist that specifies which fringe
3829 indicators to display and where. Each element of the alist should
3830 have the form @code{(@var{indicator} . @var{position})}. Here,
3831 @var{indicator} is one of @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{up},
3832 @code{down}, and @code{t} (which covers all the icons not yet
3833 specified), while @var{position} is one of @code{left}, @code{right}
3834 and @code{nil}.
3835
3836 For example, @code{((top . left) (t . right))} places the top angle
3837 bitmap in left fringe, and the bottom angle bitmap as well as both
3838 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show the angle bitmaps in the left
3839 fringe, and no arrow bitmaps, use @code{((top . left) (bottom . left))}.
3840 @end defopt
3841
3842 @defvar fringe-indicator-alist
3843 This buffer-local variable specifies the mapping from logical fringe
3844 indicators to the actual bitmaps displayed in the window fringes. The
3845 value is an alist of elements @code{(@var{indicator}
3846 . @var{bitmaps})}, where @var{indicator} specifies a logical indicator
3847 type and @var{bitmaps} specifies the fringe bitmaps to use for that
3848 indicator.
3849
3850 Each @var{indicator} should be one of the following symbols:
3851
3852 @table @asis
3853 @item @code{truncation}, @code{continuation}.
3854 Used for truncation and continuation lines.
3855
3856 @item @code{up}, @code{down}, @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{top-bottom}
3857 Used when @code{indicate-buffer-boundaries} is non-@code{nil}:
3858 @code{up} and @code{down} indicate a buffer boundary lying above or
3859 below the window edge; @code{top} and @code{bottom} indicate the
3860 topmost and bottommost buffer text line; and @code{top-bottom}
3861 indicates where there is just one line of text in the buffer.
3862
3863 @item @code{empty-line}
3864 Used to indicate empty lines when @code{indicate-empty-lines} is
3865 non-@code{nil}.
3866
3867 @item @code{overlay-arrow}
3868 Used for overlay arrows (@pxref{Overlay Arrow}).
3869 @c Is this used anywhere?
3870 @c @item Unknown bitmap indicator:
3871 @c @code{unknown}.
3872 @end table
3873
3874 Each @var{bitmaps} value may be a list of symbols @code{(@var{left}
3875 @var{right} [@var{left1} @var{right1}])}. The @var{left} and
3876 @var{right} symbols specify the bitmaps shown in the left and/or right
3877 fringe, for the specific indicator. @var{left1} and @var{right1} are
3878 specific to the @code{bottom} and @code{top-bottom} indicators, and
3879 are used to indicate that the last text line has no final newline.
3880 Alternatively, @var{bitmaps} may be a single symbol which is used in
3881 both left and right fringes.
3882
3883 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for a list of standard bitmap symbols and how
3884 to define your own. In addition, @code{nil} represents the empty
3885 bitmap (i.e., an indicator that is not shown).
3886
3887 When @code{fringe-indicator-alist} has a buffer-local value, and
3888 there is no bitmap defined for a logical indicator, or the bitmap is
3889 @code{t}, the corresponding value from the default value of
3890 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} is used.
3891 @end defvar
3892
3893 @node Fringe Cursors
3894 @subsection Fringe Cursors
3895 @cindex fringe cursors
3896 @cindex cursor, fringe
3897
3898 When a line is exactly as wide as the window, Emacs displays the
3899 cursor in the right fringe instead of using two lines. Different
3900 bitmaps are used to represent the cursor in the fringe depending on
3901 the current buffer's cursor type.
3902
3903 @defopt overflow-newline-into-fringe
3904 If this is non-@code{nil}, lines exactly as wide as the window (not
3905 counting the final newline character) are not continued. Instead,
3906 when point is at the end of the line, the cursor appears in the right
3907 fringe.
3908 @end defopt
3909
3910 @defvar fringe-cursor-alist
3911 This variable specifies the mapping from logical cursor type to the
3912 actual fringe bitmaps displayed in the right fringe. The value is an
3913 alist where each element has the form @code{(@var{cursor-type}
3914 . @var{bitmap})}, which means to use the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to
3915 display cursors of type @var{cursor-type}.
3916
3917 Each @var{cursor-type} should be one of @code{box}, @code{hollow},
3918 @code{bar}, @code{hbar}, or @code{hollow-small}. The first four have
3919 the same meanings as in the @code{cursor-type} frame parameter
3920 (@pxref{Cursor Parameters}). The @code{hollow-small} type is used
3921 instead of @code{hollow} when the normal @code{hollow-rectangle}
3922 bitmap is too tall to fit on a specific display line.
3923
3924 Each @var{bitmap} should be a symbol specifying the fringe bitmap to
3925 be displayed for that logical cursor type.
3926 @iftex
3927 See the next subsection for details.
3928 @end iftex
3929 @ifnottex
3930 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}.
3931 @end ifnottex
3932
3933 @c FIXME: I can't find the fringes-indicator-alist variable. Maybe
3934 @c it should be fringe-indicator-alist or fringe-cursor-alist? --xfq
3935 When @code{fringe-cursor-alist} has a buffer-local value, and there is
3936 no bitmap defined for a cursor type, the corresponding value from the
3937 default value of @code{fringes-indicator-alist} is used.
3938 @end defvar
3939
3940 @node Fringe Bitmaps
3941 @subsection Fringe Bitmaps
3942 @cindex fringe bitmaps
3943 @cindex bitmaps, fringe
3944
3945 The @dfn{fringe bitmaps} are the actual bitmaps which represent the
3946 logical fringe indicators for truncated or continued lines, buffer
3947 boundaries, overlay arrows, etc. Each bitmap is represented by a
3948 symbol.
3949 @iftex
3950 These symbols are referred to by the variables
3951 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist},
3952 described in the previous subsections.
3953 @end iftex
3954 @ifnottex
3955 These symbols are referred to by the variable
3956 @code{fringe-indicator-alist}, which maps fringe indicators to bitmaps
3957 (@pxref{Fringe Indicators}), and the variable
3958 @code{fringe-cursor-alist}, which maps fringe cursors to bitmaps
3959 (@pxref{Fringe Cursors}).
3960 @end ifnottex
3961
3962 Lisp programs can also directly display a bitmap in the left or
3963 right fringe, by using a @code{display} property for one of the
3964 characters appearing in the line (@pxref{Other Display Specs}). Such
3965 a display specification has the form
3966
3967 @example
3968 (@var{fringe} @var{bitmap} [@var{face}])
3969 @end example
3970
3971 @noindent
3972 @var{fringe} is either the symbol @code{left-fringe} or
3973 @code{right-fringe}. @var{bitmap} is a symbol identifying the bitmap
3974 to display. The optional @var{face} names a face whose foreground
3975 color is used to display the bitmap; this face is automatically merged
3976 with the @code{fringe} face.
3977
3978 Here is a list of the standard fringe bitmaps defined in Emacs, and
3979 how they are currently used in Emacs (via
3980 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist}):
3981
3982 @table @asis
3983 @item @code{left-arrow}, @code{right-arrow}
3984 Used to indicate truncated lines.
3985
3986 @item @code{left-curly-arrow}, @code{right-curly-arrow}
3987 Used to indicate continued lines.
3988
3989 @item @code{right-triangle}, @code{left-triangle}
3990 The former is used by overlay arrows. The latter is unused.
3991
3992 @item @code{up-arrow}, @code{down-arrow}, @code{top-left-angle} @code{top-right-angle}
3993 @itemx @code{bottom-left-angle}, @code{bottom-right-angle}
3994 @itemx @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
3995 @itemx @code{left-bracket}, @code{right-bracket}, @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
3996 Used to indicate buffer boundaries.
3997
3998 @item @code{filled-rectangle}, @code{hollow-rectangle}
3999 @itemx @code{filled-square}, @code{hollow-square}
4000 @itemx @code{vertical-bar}, @code{horizontal-bar}
4001 Used for different types of fringe cursors.
4002
4003 @item @code{empty-line}, @code{exclamation-mark}, @code{question-mark}, @code{exclamation-mark}
4004 Not used by core Emacs features.
4005 @end table
4006
4007 @noindent
4008 The next subsection describes how to define your own fringe bitmaps.
4009
4010 @defun fringe-bitmaps-at-pos &optional pos window
4011 This function returns the fringe bitmaps of the display line
4012 containing position @var{pos} in window @var{window}. The return
4013 value has the form @code{(@var{left} @var{right} @var{ov})}, where @var{left}
4014 is the symbol for the fringe bitmap in the left fringe (or @code{nil}
4015 if no bitmap), @var{right} is similar for the right fringe, and @var{ov}
4016 is non-@code{nil} if there is an overlay arrow in the left fringe.
4017
4018 The value is @code{nil} if @var{pos} is not visible in @var{window}.
4019 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, that stands for the selected window.
4020 If @var{pos} is @code{nil}, that stands for the value of point in
4021 @var{window}.
4022 @end defun
4023
4024 @node Customizing Bitmaps
4025 @subsection Customizing Fringe Bitmaps
4026 @cindex fringe bitmaps, customizing
4027
4028 @defun define-fringe-bitmap bitmap bits &optional height width align
4029 This function defines the symbol @var{bitmap} as a new fringe bitmap,
4030 or replaces an existing bitmap with that name.
4031
4032 The argument @var{bits} specifies the image to use. It should be
4033 either a string or a vector of integers, where each element (an
4034 integer) corresponds to one row of the bitmap. Each bit of an integer
4035 corresponds to one pixel of the bitmap, where the low bit corresponds
4036 to the rightmost pixel of the bitmap.
4037
4038 The height is normally the length of @var{bits}. However, you
4039 can specify a different height with non-@code{nil} @var{height}. The width
4040 is normally 8, but you can specify a different width with non-@code{nil}
4041 @var{width}. The width must be an integer between 1 and 16.
4042
4043 The argument @var{align} specifies the positioning of the bitmap
4044 relative to the range of rows where it is used; the default is to
4045 center the bitmap. The allowed values are @code{top}, @code{center},
4046 or @code{bottom}.
4047
4048 The @var{align} argument may also be a list @code{(@var{align}
4049 @var{periodic})} where @var{align} is interpreted as described above.
4050 If @var{periodic} is non-@code{nil}, it specifies that the rows in
4051 @code{bits} should be repeated enough times to reach the specified
4052 height.
4053 @end defun
4054
4055 @defun destroy-fringe-bitmap bitmap
4056 This function destroy the fringe bitmap identified by @var{bitmap}.
4057 If @var{bitmap} identifies a standard fringe bitmap, it actually
4058 restores the standard definition of that bitmap, instead of
4059 eliminating it entirely.
4060 @end defun
4061
4062 @defun set-fringe-bitmap-face bitmap &optional face
4063 This sets the face for the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to @var{face}.
4064 If @var{face} is @code{nil}, it selects the @code{fringe} face. The
4065 bitmap's face controls the color to draw it in.
4066
4067 @var{face} is merged with the @code{fringe} face, so normally
4068 @var{face} should specify only the foreground color.
4069 @end defun
4070
4071 @node Overlay Arrow
4072 @subsection The Overlay Arrow
4073 @c @cindex overlay arrow Duplicates variable names
4074
4075 The @dfn{overlay arrow} is useful for directing the user's attention
4076 to a particular line in a buffer. For example, in the modes used for
4077 interface to debuggers, the overlay arrow indicates the line of code
4078 about to be executed. This feature has nothing to do with
4079 @dfn{overlays} (@pxref{Overlays}).
4080
4081 @defvar overlay-arrow-string
4082 This variable holds the string to display to call attention to a
4083 particular line, or @code{nil} if the arrow feature is not in use.
4084 On a graphical display the contents of the string are ignored; instead a
4085 glyph is displayed in the fringe area to the left of the display area.
4086 @end defvar
4087
4088 @defvar overlay-arrow-position
4089 This variable holds a marker that indicates where to display the overlay
4090 arrow. It should point at the beginning of a line. On a non-graphical
4091 display the arrow text
4092 appears at the beginning of that line, overlaying any text that would
4093 otherwise appear. Since the arrow is usually short, and the line
4094 usually begins with indentation, normally nothing significant is
4095 overwritten.
4096
4097 The overlay-arrow string is displayed in any given buffer if the value
4098 of @code{overlay-arrow-position} in that buffer points into that
4099 buffer. Thus, it is possible to display multiple overlay arrow strings
4100 by creating buffer-local bindings of @code{overlay-arrow-position}.
4101 However, it is usually cleaner to use
4102 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list} to achieve this result.
4103 @c !!! overlay-arrow-position: but the overlay string may remain in the display
4104 @c of some other buffer until an update is required. This should be fixed
4105 @c now. Is it?
4106 @end defvar
4107
4108 You can do a similar job by creating an overlay with a
4109 @code{before-string} property. @xref{Overlay Properties}.
4110
4111 You can define multiple overlay arrows via the variable
4112 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list}.
4113
4114 @defvar overlay-arrow-variable-list
4115 This variable's value is a list of variables, each of which specifies
4116 the position of an overlay arrow. The variable
4117 @code{overlay-arrow-position} has its normal meaning because it is on
4118 this list.
4119 @end defvar
4120
4121 Each variable on this list can have properties
4122 @code{overlay-arrow-string} and @code{overlay-arrow-bitmap} that
4123 specify an overlay arrow string (for text terminals) or fringe bitmap
4124 (for graphical terminals) to display at the corresponding overlay
4125 arrow position. If either property is not set, the default
4126 @code{overlay-arrow-string} or @code{overlay-arrow} fringe indicator
4127 is used.
4128
4129
4130 @node Scroll Bars
4131 @section Scroll Bars
4132 @cindex scroll bars
4133
4134 Normally the frame parameter @code{vertical-scroll-bars} controls
4135 whether the windows in the frame have vertical scroll bars, and whether
4136 they are on the left or right. The frame parameter
4137 @code{scroll-bar-width} specifies how wide they are (@code{nil} meaning
4138 the default).
4139
4140 The frame parameter @code{horizontal-scroll-bars} controls whether
4141 the windows in the frame have horizontal scroll bars. The frame
4142 parameter @code{scroll-bar-height} specifies how high they are
4143 (@code{nil} meaning the default). @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4144
4145 @vindex horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p
4146 Horizontal scroll bars are not available on all platforms. The
4147 function @code{horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p} which takes no
4148 argument returns non-@code{nil} if they are available on your system.
4149
4150 The following three functions take as argument a live frame which
4151 defaults to the selected one.
4152
4153 @defun frame-current-scroll-bars &optional frame
4154 This function reports the scroll bar types for frame @var{frame}. The
4155 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4156 @var{horizontal-type})}, where @var{vertical-type} is either
4157 @code{left}, @code{right}, or @code{nil} (which means no vertical scroll
4158 bar.) @var{horizontal-type} is either @code{bottom} or @code{nil}
4159 (which means no horizontal scroll bar).
4160 @end defun
4161
4162 @defun frame-scroll-bar-width &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4163 This function returns the width of vertical scroll bars of @var{frame}
4164 in pixels.
4165 @end defun
4166
4167 @defun frame-scroll-bar-height &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4168 This function returns the height of horizontal scroll bars of
4169 @var{frame} in pixels.
4170 @end defun
4171
4172 You can override the frame specific settings for individual windows by
4173 using the following function:
4174
4175 @defun set-window-scroll-bars window &optional width vertical-type height horizontal-type
4176 This function sets the width and/or height and the types of scroll bars
4177 for window @var{window}.
4178
4179 @var{width} specifies the width of the vertical scroll bar in pixels
4180 (@code{nil} means use the width specified for the frame).
4181 @var{vertical-type} specifies whether to have a vertical scroll bar and,
4182 if so, where. The possible values are @code{left}, @code{right},
4183 @code{t}, which means to use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no
4184 vertical scroll bar.
4185
4186 @var{height} specifies the height of the horizontal scroll bar in pixels
4187 (@code{nil} means use the height specified for the frame).
4188 @var{horizontal-type} specifies whether to have a horizontal scroll bar.
4189 The possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4190 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no horizontal scroll bar.
4191
4192 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
4193 @end defun
4194
4195 The following four functions take as argument a live window which
4196 defaults to the selected one.
4197
4198 @defun window-scroll-bars &optional window
4199 This function returns a list of the form @code{(@var{width}
4200 @var{columns} @var{vertical-type} @var{height} @var{lines}
4201 @var{horizontal-type})}.
4202
4203 The value @var{width} is the value that was specified for the width of
4204 the vertical scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{columns} is the
4205 (possibly rounded) number of columns that the vertical scroll bar
4206 actually occupies.
4207
4208 The value @var{height} is the value that was specified for the height of
4209 the horizontal scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{lines} is the
4210 (possibly rounded) number of lines that the horizontally scroll bar
4211 actually occupies.
4212 @end defun
4213
4214 @defun window-current-scroll-bars &optional window
4215 This function reports the scroll bar type for window @var{window}. The
4216 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4217 @var{horizontal-type})}. Unlike @code{window-scroll-bars}, this reports
4218 the scroll bar type actually used, once frame defaults and
4219 @code{scroll-bar-mode} are taken into account.
4220 @end defun
4221
4222 @defun window-scroll-bar-width &optional window
4223 This function returns the width in pixels of @var{window}'s vertical
4224 scrollbar.
4225 @end defun
4226
4227 @defun window-scroll-bar-height &optional window
4228 This function returns the height in pixels of @var{window}'s horizontal
4229 scrollbar.
4230 @end defun
4231
4232 If you don't specify these values for a window with
4233 @code{set-window-scroll-bars}, the buffer-local variables
4234 @code{vertical-scroll-bar}, @code{horizontal-scroll-bar},
4235 @code{scroll-bar-width} and @code{scroll-bar-height} in the buffer being
4236 displayed control the window's scroll bars. The function
4237 @code{set-window-buffer} examines these variables. If you change them
4238 in a buffer that is already visible in a window, you can make the window
4239 take note of the new values by calling @code{set-window-buffer}
4240 specifying the same buffer that is already displayed.
4241
4242 You can control the appearance of scroll bars for a particular buffer by
4243 setting the following variables which automatically become buffer-local
4244 when set.
4245
4246 @defvar vertical-scroll-bar
4247 This variable specifies the location of the vertical scroll bar. The
4248 possible values are @code{left}, @code{right}, @code{t}, which means to
4249 use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4250 @end defvar
4251
4252 @defvar horizontal-scroll-bar
4253 This variable specifies the location of the horizontal scroll bar. The
4254 possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4255 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4256 @end defvar
4257
4258 @defvar scroll-bar-width
4259 This variable specifies the width of the buffer's vertical scroll bars,
4260 measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4261 specified by the frame.
4262 @end defvar
4263
4264 @defvar scroll-bar-height
4265 This variable specifies the height of the buffer's horizontal scroll
4266 bar, measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4267 specified by the frame.
4268 @end defvar
4269
4270 Finally you can toggle the display of scroll bars on all frames by
4271 customizing the variables @code{scroll-bar-mode} and
4272 @code{horizontal-scroll-bar-mode}.
4273
4274 @defopt scroll-bar-mode
4275 This variable controls whether and where to put vertical scroll bars in
4276 all frames. The possible values are @code{nil} for no scroll bars,
4277 @code{left} to put scroll bars on the left and @code{right} to put
4278 scroll bars on the right.
4279 @end defopt
4280
4281 @defopt horizontal-scroll-bar-mode
4282 This variable controls whether to display horizontal scroll bars on all
4283 frames.
4284 @end defopt
4285
4286
4287 @node Window Dividers
4288 @section Window Dividers
4289 @cindex window dividers
4290 @cindex right dividers
4291 @cindex bottom dividers
4292
4293 Window dividers are bars drawn between a frame's windows. A right
4294 divider is drawn between a window and any adjacent windows on the right.
4295 Its width (thickness) is specified by the frame parameter
4296 @code{right-divider-width}. A bottom divider is drawn between a
4297 window and adjacent windows on the bottom or the echo area. Its width
4298 is specified by the frame parameter @code{bottom-divider-width}. In
4299 either case, specifying a width of zero means to not draw such dividers.
4300 @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4301
4302 Technically, a right divider belongs to the window on its left,
4303 which means that its width contributes to the total width of that
4304 window. A bottom divider belongs to the window above it, which
4305 means that its width contributes to the total height of that window.
4306 @xref{Window Sizes}. When a window has both, a right and a bottom
4307 divider, the bottom divider prevails. This means that a bottom
4308 divider is drawn over the full total width of its window while the right
4309 divider ends above the bottom divider.
4310
4311 Dividers can be dragged with the mouse and are therefore useful for
4312 adjusting the sizes of adjacent windows with the mouse. They also serve
4313 to visually set apart adjacent windows when no scroll bars or mode lines
4314 are present. The following three faces allow the customization of the
4315 appearance of dividers:
4316
4317 @table @code
4318 @item window-divider
4319 When a divider is less than three pixels wide, it is drawn solidly with
4320 the foreground of this face. For larger dividers this face is used for
4321 the inner part only, excluding the first and last pixel.
4322
4323 @item window-divider-first-pixel
4324 This is the face used for drawing the first pixel of a divider that is
4325 at least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to
4326 the same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4327
4328 @item window-divider-last-pixel
4329 This is the face used for drawing the last pixel of a divider that is at
4330 least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to the
4331 same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4332 @end table
4333
4334 You can get the sizes of the dividers of a specific window with the
4335 following two functions.
4336
4337 @defun window-right-divider-width &optional window
4338 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s right divider.
4339 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4340 The return value is always zero for a rightmost window.
4341 @end defun
4342
4343 @defun window-bottom-divider-width &optional window
4344 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s bottom divider.
4345 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4346 The return value is zero for the minibuffer window or a bottommost
4347 window on a minibuffer-less frame.
4348 @end defun
4349
4350
4351 @node Display Property
4352 @section The @code{display} Property
4353 @cindex display specification
4354 @kindex display @r{(text property)}
4355
4356 The @code{display} text property (or overlay property) is used to
4357 insert images into text, and to control other aspects of how text
4358 displays. The value of the @code{display} property should be a
4359 display specification, or a list or vector containing several display
4360 specifications. Display specifications in the same @code{display}
4361 property value generally apply in parallel to the text they cover.
4362
4363 If several sources (overlays and/or a text property) specify values
4364 for the @code{display} property, only one of the values takes effect,
4365 following the rules of @code{get-char-property}. @xref{Examining
4366 Properties}.
4367
4368 The rest of this section describes several kinds of
4369 display specifications and what they mean.
4370
4371 @menu
4372 * Replacing Specs:: Display specs that replace the text.
4373 * Specified Space:: Displaying one space with a specified width.
4374 * Pixel Specification:: Specifying space width or height in pixels.
4375 * Other Display Specs:: Displaying an image; adjusting the height,
4376 spacing, and other properties of text.
4377 * Display Margins:: Displaying text or images to the side of the main text.
4378 @end menu
4379
4380 @node Replacing Specs
4381 @subsection Display Specs That Replace The Text
4382 @cindex replacing display specs
4383
4384 Some kinds of display specifications specify something to display
4385 instead of the text that has the property. These are called
4386 @dfn{replacing} display specifications. Emacs does not allow the user
4387 to interactively move point into the middle of buffer text that is
4388 replaced in this way.
4389
4390 If a list of display specifications includes more than one replacing
4391 display specification, the first overrides the rest. Replacing
4392 display specifications make most other display specifications
4393 irrelevant, since those don't apply to the replacement.
4394
4395 For replacing display specifications, @dfn{the text that has the
4396 property} means all the consecutive characters that have the same
4397 Lisp object as their @code{display} property; these characters are
4398 replaced as a single unit. If two characters have different Lisp
4399 objects as their @code{display} properties (i.e., objects which are
4400 not @code{eq}), they are handled separately.
4401
4402 Here is an example which illustrates this point. A string serves as
4403 a replacing display specification, which replaces the text that has
4404 the property with the specified string (@pxref{Other Display Specs}).
4405 Consider the following function:
4406
4407 @smallexample
4408 (defun foo ()
4409 (dotimes (i 5)
4410 (let ((string (concat "A"))
4411 (start (+ i i (point-min))))
4412 (put-text-property start (1+ start) 'display string)
4413 (put-text-property start (+ 2 start) 'display string))))
4414 @end smallexample
4415
4416 @noindent
4417 This function gives each of the first ten characters in the buffer a
4418 @code{display} property which is a string @code{"A"}, but they don't
4419 all get the same string object. The first two characters get the same
4420 string object, so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; the fact that
4421 the display property was assigned in two separate calls to
4422 @code{put-text-property} is irrelevant. Similarly, the next two
4423 characters get a second string (@code{concat} creates a new string
4424 object), so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; and so on. Thus, the
4425 ten characters appear as five A's.
4426
4427 @node Specified Space
4428 @subsection Specified Spaces
4429 @cindex spaces, specified height or width
4430 @cindex variable-width spaces
4431
4432 To display a space of specified width and/or height, use a display
4433 specification of the form @code{(space . @var{props})}, where
4434 @var{props} is a property list (a list of alternating properties and
4435 values). You can put this property on one or more consecutive
4436 characters; a space of the specified height and width is displayed in
4437 place of @emph{all} of those characters. These are the properties you
4438 can use in @var{props} to specify the weight of the space:
4439
4440 @table @code
4441 @item :width @var{width}
4442 If @var{width} is a number, it specifies
4443 that the space width should be @var{width} times the normal character
4444 width. @var{width} can also be a @dfn{pixel width} specification
4445 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4446
4447 @item :relative-width @var{factor}
4448 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4449 first character in the group of consecutive characters that have the
4450 same @code{display} property. The space width is the pixel width of
4451 that character, multiplied by @var{factor}. (On text-mode terminals,
4452 the ``pixel width'' of a character is usually 1, but it could be more
4453 for TABs and double-width CJK characters.)
4454
4455 @item :align-to @var{hpos}
4456 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach @var{hpos}.
4457 If @var{hpos} is a number, it is measured in units of the normal
4458 character width. @var{hpos} can also be a @dfn{pixel width}
4459 specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4460 @end table
4461
4462 You should use one and only one of the above properties. You can
4463 also specify the height of the space, with these properties:
4464
4465 @table @code
4466 @item :height @var{height}
4467 Specifies the height of the space.
4468 If @var{height} is a number, it specifies
4469 that the space height should be @var{height} times the normal character
4470 height. The @var{height} may also be a @dfn{pixel height} specification
4471 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4472
4473 @item :relative-height @var{factor}
4474 Specifies the height of the space, multiplying the ordinary height
4475 of the text having this display specification by @var{factor}.
4476
4477 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4478 If the value of @var{ascent} is a non-negative number no greater than
4479 100, it specifies that @var{ascent} percent of the height of the space
4480 should be considered as the ascent of the space---that is, the part
4481 above the baseline. The ascent may also be specified in pixel units
4482 with a @dfn{pixel ascent} specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4483
4484 @end table
4485
4486 Don't use both @code{:height} and @code{:relative-height} together.
4487
4488 The @code{:width} and @code{:align-to} properties are supported on
4489 non-graphic terminals, but the other space properties in this section
4490 are not.
4491
4492 Note that space properties are treated as paragraph separators for
4493 the purposes of reordering bidirectional text for display.
4494 @xref{Bidirectional Display}, for the details.
4495
4496 @node Pixel Specification
4497 @subsection Pixel Specification for Spaces
4498 @cindex spaces, pixel specification
4499
4500 The value of the @code{:width}, @code{:align-to}, @code{:height},
4501 and @code{:ascent} properties can be a special kind of expression that
4502 is evaluated during redisplay. The result of the evaluation is used
4503 as an absolute number of pixels.
4504
4505 The following expressions are supported:
4506
4507 @smallexample
4508 @group
4509 @var{expr} ::= @var{num} | (@var{num}) | @var{unit} | @var{elem} | @var{pos} | @var{image} | @var{form}
4510 @var{num} ::= @var{integer} | @var{float} | @var{symbol}
4511 @var{unit} ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4512 @end group
4513 @group
4514 @var{elem} ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4515 | scroll-bar | text
4516 @var{pos} ::= left | center | right
4517 @var{form} ::= (@var{num} . @var{expr}) | (@var{op} @var{expr} ...)
4518 @var{op} ::= + | -
4519 @end group
4520 @end smallexample
4521
4522 The form @var{num} specifies a fraction of the default frame font
4523 height or width. The form @code{(@var{num})} specifies an absolute
4524 number of pixels. If @var{num} is a symbol, @var{symbol}, its
4525 buffer-local variable binding is used.
4526
4527 The @code{in}, @code{mm}, and @code{cm} units specify the number of
4528 pixels per inch, millimeter, and centimeter, respectively. The
4529 @code{width} and @code{height} units correspond to the default width
4530 and height of the current face. An image specification @code{image}
4531 corresponds to the width or height of the image.
4532
4533 The elements @code{left-fringe}, @code{right-fringe},
4534 @code{left-margin}, @code{right-margin}, @code{scroll-bar}, and
4535 @code{text} specify to the width of the corresponding area of the
4536 window.
4537
4538 The @code{left}, @code{center}, and @code{right} positions can be
4539 used with @code{:align-to} to specify a position relative to the left
4540 edge, center, or right edge of the text area.
4541
4542 Any of the above window elements (except @code{text}) can also be
4543 used with @code{:align-to} to specify that the position is relative to
4544 the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for a relative
4545 position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of these
4546 symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as the
4547 width of the specified area. For example, to align to the center of
4548 the left-margin, use
4549
4550 @example
4551 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4552 @end example
4553
4554 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4555 to the left edge of the text area. For example, @samp{:align-to 0} in a
4556 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4557
4558 A value of the form @code{(@var{num} . @var{expr})} stands for the
4559 product of the values of @var{num} and @var{expr}. For example,
4560 @code{(2 . in)} specifies a width of 2 inches, while @code{(0.5 .
4561 @var{image})} specifies half the width (or height) of the specified
4562 image.
4563
4564 The form @code{(+ @var{expr} ...)} adds up the value of the
4565 expressions. The form @code{(- @var{expr} ...)} negates or subtracts
4566 the value of the expressions.
4567
4568 @node Other Display Specs
4569 @subsection Other Display Specifications
4570
4571 Here are the other sorts of display specifications that you can use
4572 in the @code{display} text property.
4573
4574 @table @code
4575 @item @var{string}
4576 Display @var{string} instead of the text that has this property.
4577
4578 Recursive display specifications are not supported---@var{string}'s
4579 @code{display} properties, if any, are not used.
4580
4581 @item (image . @var{image-props})
4582 This kind of display specification is an image descriptor (@pxref{Images}).
4583 When used as a display specification, it means to display the image
4584 instead of the text that has the display specification.
4585
4586 @item (slice @var{x} @var{y} @var{width} @var{height})
4587 This specification together with @code{image} specifies a @dfn{slice}
4588 (a partial area) of the image to display. The elements @var{y} and
4589 @var{x} specify the top left corner of the slice, within the image;
4590 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the width and height of the
4591 slice. Integers are numbers of pixels. A floating-point number
4592 in the range 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height
4593 of the entire image.
4594
4595 @item ((margin nil) @var{string})
4596 A display specification of this form means to display @var{string}
4597 instead of the text that has the display specification, at the same
4598 position as that text. It is equivalent to using just @var{string},
4599 but it is done as a special case of marginal display (@pxref{Display
4600 Margins}).
4601
4602 @item (left-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4603 @itemx (right-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4604 This display specification on any character of a line of text causes
4605 the specified @var{bitmap} be displayed in the left or right fringes
4606 for that line, instead of the characters that have the display
4607 specification. The optional @var{face} specifies the colors to be
4608 used for the bitmap. @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for the details.
4609
4610 @item (space-width @var{factor})
4611 This display specification affects all the space characters within the
4612 text that has the specification. It displays all of these spaces
4613 @var{factor} times as wide as normal. The element @var{factor} should
4614 be an integer or float. Characters other than spaces are not affected
4615 at all; in particular, this has no effect on tab characters.
4616
4617 @item (height @var{height})
4618 This display specification makes the text taller or shorter.
4619 Here are the possibilities for @var{height}:
4620
4621 @table @asis
4622 @item @code{(+ @var{n})}
4623 @c FIXME: Add an index for "step"? --xfq
4624 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps larger. A @dfn{step} is
4625 defined by the set of available fonts---specifically, those that match
4626 what was otherwise specified for this text, in all attributes except
4627 height. Each size for which a suitable font is available counts as
4628 another step. @var{n} should be an integer.
4629
4630 @item @code{(- @var{n})}
4631 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps smaller.
4632
4633 @item a number, @var{factor}
4634 A number, @var{factor}, means to use a font that is @var{factor} times
4635 as tall as the default font.
4636
4637 @item a symbol, @var{function}
4638 A symbol is a function to compute the height. It is called with the
4639 current height as argument, and should return the new height to use.
4640
4641 @item anything else, @var{form}
4642 If the @var{height} value doesn't fit the previous possibilities, it is
4643 a form. Emacs evaluates it to get the new height, with the symbol
4644 @code{height} bound to the current specified font height.
4645 @end table
4646
4647 @item (raise @var{factor})
4648 This kind of display specification raises or lowers the text
4649 it applies to, relative to the baseline of the line.
4650
4651 @var{factor} must be a number, which is interpreted as a multiple of the
4652 height of the affected text. If it is positive, that means to display
4653 the characters raised. If it is negative, that means to display them
4654 lower down.
4655
4656 If the text also has a @code{height} display specification, that does
4657 not affect the amount of raising or lowering, which is based on the
4658 faces used for the text.
4659 @end table
4660
4661 @c We put all the '@code{(when ...)}' on one line to encourage
4662 @c makeinfo's end-of-sentence heuristics to DTRT. Previously, the dot
4663 @c was at eol; the info file ended up w/ two spaces rendered after it.
4664 You can make any display specification conditional. To do that,
4665 package it in another list of the form
4666 @code{(when @var{condition} . @var{spec})}.
4667 Then the specification @var{spec} applies only when
4668 @var{condition} evaluates to a non-@code{nil} value. During the
4669 evaluation, @code{object} is bound to the string or buffer having the
4670 conditional @code{display} property. @code{position} and
4671 @code{buffer-position} are bound to the position within @code{object}
4672 and the buffer position where the @code{display} property was found,
4673 respectively. Both positions can be different when @code{object} is a
4674 string.
4675
4676 @node Display Margins
4677 @subsection Displaying in the Margins
4678 @cindex display margins
4679 @cindex margins, display
4680
4681 A buffer can have blank areas called @dfn{display margins} on the
4682 left and on the right. Ordinary text never appears in these areas,
4683 but you can put things into the display margins using the
4684 @code{display} property. There is currently no way to make text or
4685 images in the margin mouse-sensitive.
4686
4687 The way to display something in the margins is to specify it in a
4688 margin display specification in the @code{display} property of some
4689 text. This is a replacing display specification, meaning that the
4690 text you put it on does not get displayed; the margin display appears,
4691 but that text does not.
4692
4693 A margin display specification looks like @code{((margin
4694 right-margin) @var{spec})} or @code{((margin left-margin) @var{spec})}.
4695 Here, @var{spec} is another display specification that says what to
4696 display in the margin. Typically it is a string of text to display,
4697 or an image descriptor.
4698
4699 To display something in the margin @emph{in association with}
4700 certain buffer text, without altering or preventing the display of
4701 that text, put a @code{before-string} property on the text and put the
4702 margin display specification on the contents of the before-string.
4703
4704 Before the display margins can display anything, you must give
4705 them a nonzero width. The usual way to do that is to set these
4706 variables:
4707
4708 @defvar left-margin-width
4709 This variable specifies the width of the left margin, in character
4710 cell (a.k.a.@: ``column'') units. It is buffer-local in all buffers.
4711 A value of @code{nil} means no left marginal area.
4712 @end defvar
4713
4714 @defvar right-margin-width
4715 This variable specifies the width of the right margin, in character
4716 cell units. It is buffer-local in all buffers. A value of @code{nil}
4717 means no right marginal area.
4718 @end defvar
4719
4720 Setting these variables does not immediately affect the window. These
4721 variables are checked when a new buffer is displayed in the window.
4722 Thus, you can make changes take effect by calling
4723 @code{set-window-buffer}.
4724
4725 You can also set the margin widths immediately.
4726
4727 @defun set-window-margins window left &optional right
4728 This function specifies the margin widths for window @var{window}, in
4729 character cell units. The argument @var{left} controls the left
4730 margin, and @var{right} controls the right margin (default @code{0}).
4731 @end defun
4732
4733 @defun window-margins &optional window
4734 This function returns the width of the left and right margins of
4735 @var{window} as a cons cell of the form @w{@code{(@var{left}
4736 . @var{right})}}. If one of the two marginal areas does not exist,
4737 its width is returned as @code{nil}; if neither of the two margins exist,
4738 the function returns @code{(nil)}. If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the
4739 selected window is used.
4740 @end defun
4741
4742 @node Images
4743 @section Images
4744 @cindex images in buffers
4745
4746 To display an image in an Emacs buffer, you must first create an image
4747 descriptor, then use it as a display specifier in the @code{display}
4748 property of text that is displayed (@pxref{Display Property}).
4749
4750 Emacs is usually able to display images when it is run on a
4751 graphical terminal. Images cannot be displayed in a text terminal, on
4752 certain graphical terminals that lack the support for this, or if
4753 Emacs is compiled without image support. You can use the function
4754 @code{display-images-p} to determine if images can in principle be
4755 displayed (@pxref{Display Feature Testing}).
4756
4757 @menu
4758 * Image Formats:: Supported image formats.
4759 * Image Descriptors:: How to specify an image for use in @code{:display}.
4760 * XBM Images:: Special features for XBM format.
4761 * XPM Images:: Special features for XPM format.
4762 * PostScript Images:: Special features for PostScript format.
4763 * ImageMagick Images:: Special features available through ImageMagick.
4764 * Other Image Types:: Various other formats are supported.
4765 * Defining Images:: Convenient ways to define an image for later use.
4766 * Showing Images:: Convenient ways to display an image once it is defined.
4767 * Multi-Frame Images:: Some images contain more than one frame.
4768 * Image Cache:: Internal mechanisms of image display.
4769 @end menu
4770
4771 @node Image Formats
4772 @subsection Image Formats
4773 @cindex image formats
4774 @cindex image types
4775
4776 Emacs can display a number of different image formats. Some of
4777 these image formats are supported only if particular support libraries
4778 are installed. On some platforms, Emacs can load support libraries on
4779 demand; if so, the variable @code{dynamic-library-alist} can be used
4780 to modify the set of known names for these dynamic libraries.
4781 @xref{Dynamic Libraries}.
4782
4783 Supported image formats (and the required support libraries) include
4784 PBM and XBM (which do not depend on support libraries and are always
4785 available), XPM (@code{libXpm}), GIF (@code{libgif} or
4786 @code{libungif}), PostScript (@code{gs}), JPEG (@code{libjpeg}), TIFF
4787 (@code{libtiff}), PNG (@code{libpng}), and SVG (@code{librsvg}).
4788
4789 Each of these image formats is associated with an @dfn{image type
4790 symbol}. The symbols for the above formats are, respectively,
4791 @code{pbm}, @code{xbm}, @code{xpm}, @code{gif}, @code{postscript},
4792 @code{jpeg}, @code{tiff}, @code{png}, and @code{svg}.
4793
4794 Furthermore, if you build Emacs with ImageMagick
4795 (@code{libMagickWand}) support, Emacs can display any image format
4796 that ImageMagick can. @xref{ImageMagick Images}. All images
4797 displayed via ImageMagick have type symbol @code{imagemagick}.
4798
4799 @defvar image-types
4800 This variable contains a list of type symbols for image formats which
4801 are potentially supported in the current configuration.
4802
4803 ``Potentially'' means that Emacs knows about the image types, not
4804 necessarily that they can be used (for example, they could depend on
4805 unavailable dynamic libraries). To know which image types are really
4806 available, use @code{image-type-available-p}.
4807 @end defvar
4808
4809 @defun image-type-available-p type
4810 This function returns non-@code{nil} if images of type @var{type} can
4811 be loaded and displayed. @var{type} must be an image type symbol.
4812
4813 For image types whose support libraries are statically linked, this
4814 function always returns @code{t}. For image types whose support
4815 libraries are dynamically loaded, it returns @code{t} if the library
4816 could be loaded and @code{nil} otherwise.
4817 @end defun
4818
4819 @node Image Descriptors
4820 @subsection Image Descriptors
4821 @cindex image descriptor
4822
4823 An @dfn{image descriptor} is a list which specifies the underlying
4824 data for an image, and how to display it. It is typically used as the
4825 value of a @code{display} overlay or text property (@pxref{Other
4826 Display Specs}); but @xref{Showing Images}, for convenient helper
4827 functions to insert images into buffers.
4828
4829 Each image descriptor has the form @code{(image . @var{props})},
4830 where @var{props} is a property list of alternating keyword symbols
4831 and values, including at least the pair @code{:type @var{type}} that
4832 specifies the image type.
4833
4834 The following is a list of properties that are meaningful for all
4835 image types (there are also properties which are meaningful only for
4836 certain image types, as documented in the following subsections):
4837
4838 @table @code
4839 @item :type @var{type}
4840 The image type.
4841 @ifnottex
4842 @xref{Image Formats}.
4843 @end ifnottex
4844 Every image descriptor must include this property.
4845
4846 @item :file @var{file}
4847 This says to load the image from file @var{file}. If @var{file} is
4848 not an absolute file name, it is expanded in @code{data-directory}.
4849
4850 @item :data @var{data}
4851 This specifies the raw image data. Each image descriptor must have
4852 either @code{:data} or @code{:file}, but not both.
4853
4854 For most image types, the value of a @code{:data} property should be a
4855 string containing the image data. Some image types do not support
4856 @code{:data}; for some others, @code{:data} alone is not enough, so
4857 you need to use other image properties along with @code{:data}. See
4858 the following subsections for details.
4859
4860 @item :margin @var{margin}
4861 This specifies how many pixels to add as an extra margin around the
4862 image. The value, @var{margin}, must be a non-negative number, or a
4863 pair @code{(@var{x} . @var{y})} of such numbers. If it is a pair,
4864 @var{x} specifies how many pixels to add horizontally, and @var{y}
4865 specifies how many pixels to add vertically. If @code{:margin} is not
4866 specified, the default is zero.
4867
4868 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4869 This specifies the amount of the image's height to use for its
4870 ascent---that is, the part above the baseline. The value,
4871 @var{ascent}, must be a number in the range 0 to 100, or the symbol
4872 @code{center}.
4873
4874 If @var{ascent} is a number, that percentage of the image's height is
4875 used for its ascent.
4876
4877 If @var{ascent} is @code{center}, the image is vertically centered
4878 around a centerline which would be the vertical centerline of text drawn
4879 at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
4880 properties and overlays that apply to the image.
4881
4882 If this property is omitted, it defaults to 50.
4883
4884 @item :relief @var{relief}
4885 This adds a shadow rectangle around the image. The value,
4886 @var{relief}, specifies the width of the shadow lines, in pixels. If
4887 @var{relief} is negative, shadows are drawn so that the image appears
4888 as a pressed button; otherwise, it appears as an unpressed button.
4889
4890 @item :conversion @var{algorithm}
4891 This specifies a conversion algorithm that should be applied to the
4892 image before it is displayed; the value, @var{algorithm}, specifies
4893 which algorithm.
4894
4895 @table @code
4896 @item laplace
4897 @itemx emboss
4898 Specifies the Laplace edge detection algorithm, which blurs out small
4899 differences in color while highlighting larger differences. People
4900 sometimes consider this useful for displaying the image for a
4901 disabled button.
4902
4903 @item (edge-detection :matrix @var{matrix} :color-adjust @var{adjust})
4904 @cindex edge detection, images
4905 Specifies a general edge-detection algorithm. @var{matrix} must be
4906 either a nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel
4907 at position @math{x/y} in the transformed image is computed from
4908 original pixels around that position. @var{matrix} specifies, for each
4909 pixel in the neighborhood of @math{x/y}, a factor with which that pixel
4910 will influence the transformed pixel; element @math{0} specifies the
4911 factor for the pixel at @math{x-1/y-1}, element @math{1} the factor for
4912 the pixel at @math{x/y-1} etc., as shown below:
4913 @iftex
4914 @tex
4915 $$\pmatrix{x-1/y-1 & x/y-1 & x+1/y-1 \cr
4916 x-1/y & x/y & x+1/y \cr
4917 x-1/y+1& x/y+1 & x+1/y+1 \cr}$$
4918 @end tex
4919 @end iftex
4920 @ifnottex
4921 @display
4922 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
4923 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
4924 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
4925 @end display
4926 @end ifnottex
4927
4928 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
4929 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
4930 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
4931 of the factors' absolute values.
4932
4933 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
4934 @iftex
4935 @tex
4936 $$\pmatrix{1 & 0 & 0 \cr
4937 0& 0 & 0 \cr
4938 0 & 0 & -1 \cr}$$
4939 @end tex
4940 @end iftex
4941 @ifnottex
4942 @display
4943 (1 0 0
4944 0 0 0
4945 0 0 -1)
4946 @end display
4947 @end ifnottex
4948
4949 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
4950 @iftex
4951 @tex
4952 $$\pmatrix{ 2 & -1 & 0 \cr
4953 -1 & 0 & 1 \cr
4954 0 & 1 & -2 \cr}$$
4955 @end tex
4956 @end iftex
4957 @ifnottex
4958 @display
4959 ( 2 -1 0
4960 -1 0 1
4961 0 1 -2)
4962 @end display
4963 @end ifnottex
4964
4965 @item disabled
4966 Specifies transforming the image so that it looks disabled.
4967 @end table
4968
4969 @item :mask @var{mask}
4970 If @var{mask} is @code{heuristic} or @code{(heuristic @var{bg})}, build
4971 a clipping mask for the image, so that the background of a frame is
4972 visible behind the image. If @var{bg} is not specified, or if @var{bg}
4973 is @code{t}, determine the background color of the image by looking at
4974 the four corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occurring
4975 color from the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise,
4976 @var{bg} must be a list @code{(@var{red} @var{green} @var{blue})}
4977 specifying the color to assume for the background of the image.
4978
4979 If @var{mask} is @code{nil}, remove a mask from the image, if it has
4980 one. Images in some formats include a mask which can be removed by
4981 specifying @code{:mask nil}.
4982
4983 @item :pointer @var{shape}
4984 This specifies the pointer shape when the mouse pointer is over this
4985 image. @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
4986
4987 @item :map @var{map}
4988 @cindex image maps
4989 This associates an image map of @dfn{hot spots} with this image.
4990
4991 An image map is an alist where each element has the format
4992 @code{(@var{area} @var{id} @var{plist})}. An @var{area} is specified
4993 as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon.
4994
4995 A rectangle is a cons
4996 @code{(rect . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . (@var{x1} . @var{y1})))}
4997 which specifies the pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right
4998 corners of the rectangle area.
4999
5000 A circle is a cons
5001 @code{(circle . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . @var{r}))}
5002 which specifies the center and the radius of the circle; @var{r} may
5003 be a float or integer.
5004
5005 A polygon is a cons
5006 @code{(poly . [@var{x0} @var{y0} @var{x1} @var{y1} ...])}
5007 where each pair in the vector describes one corner in the polygon.
5008
5009 When the mouse pointer lies on a hot-spot area of an image, the
5010 @var{plist} of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a @code{help-echo}
5011 property, that defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
5012 a @code{pointer} property, that defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
5013 it is on the hot-spot.
5014 @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
5015
5016 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, an
5017 event is composed by combining the @var{id} of the hot-spot with the
5018 mouse event; for instance, @code{[area4 mouse-1]} if the hot-spot's
5019 @var{id} is @code{area4}.
5020 @end table
5021
5022 @defun image-mask-p spec &optional frame
5023 This function returns @code{t} if image @var{spec} has a mask bitmap.
5024 @var{frame} is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
5025 @var{frame} @code{nil} or omitted means to use the selected frame
5026 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5027 @end defun
5028
5029 @node XBM Images
5030 @subsection XBM Images
5031 @cindex XBM
5032
5033 To use XBM format, specify @code{xbm} as the image type. This image
5034 format doesn't require an external library, so images of this type are
5035 always supported.
5036
5037 Additional image properties supported for the @code{xbm} image type are:
5038
5039 @table @code
5040 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5041 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5042 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5043 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5044 foreground color.
5045
5046 @item :background @var{background}
5047 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5048 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5049 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5050 background color.
5051 @end table
5052
5053 If you specify an XBM image using data within Emacs instead of an
5054 external file, use the following three properties:
5055
5056 @table @code
5057 @item :data @var{data}
5058 The value, @var{data}, specifies the contents of the image.
5059 There are three formats you can use for @var{data}:
5060
5061 @itemize @bullet
5062 @item
5063 A vector of strings or bool-vectors, each specifying one line of the
5064 image. Do specify @code{:height} and @code{:width}.
5065
5066 @item
5067 A string containing the same byte sequence as an XBM file would contain.
5068 You must not specify @code{:height} and @code{:width} in this case,
5069 because omitting them is what indicates the data has the format of an
5070 XBM file. The file contents specify the height and width of the image.
5071
5072 @item
5073 A string or a bool-vector containing the bits of the image (plus perhaps
5074 some extra bits at the end that will not be used). It should contain at
5075 least @var{width} * @code{height} bits. In this case, you must specify
5076 @code{:height} and @code{:width}, both to indicate that the string
5077 contains just the bits rather than a whole XBM file, and to specify the
5078 size of the image.
5079 @end itemize
5080
5081 @item :width @var{width}
5082 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image, in pixels.
5083
5084 @item :height @var{height}
5085 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image, in pixels.
5086 @end table
5087
5088 @node XPM Images
5089 @subsection XPM Images
5090 @cindex XPM
5091
5092 To use XPM format, specify @code{xpm} as the image type. The
5093 additional image property @code{:color-symbols} is also meaningful with
5094 the @code{xpm} image type:
5095
5096 @table @code
5097 @item :color-symbols @var{symbols}
5098 The value, @var{symbols}, should be an alist whose elements have the
5099 form @code{(@var{name} . @var{color})}. In each element, @var{name} is
5100 the name of a color as it appears in the image file, and @var{color}
5101 specifies the actual color to use for displaying that name.
5102 @end table
5103
5104 @node PostScript Images
5105 @subsection PostScript Images
5106 @cindex postscript images
5107
5108 To use PostScript for an image, specify image type @code{postscript}.
5109 This works only if you have Ghostscript installed. You must always use
5110 these three properties:
5111
5112 @table @code
5113 @item :pt-width @var{width}
5114 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image measured in
5115 points (1/72 inch). @var{width} must be an integer.
5116
5117 @item :pt-height @var{height}
5118 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image in points
5119 (1/72 inch). @var{height} must be an integer.
5120
5121 @item :bounding-box @var{box}
5122 The value, @var{box}, must be a list or vector of four integers, which
5123 specifying the bounding box of the PostScript image, analogous to the
5124 @samp{BoundingBox} comment found in PostScript files.
5125
5126 @example
5127 %%BoundingBox: 22 171 567 738
5128 @end example
5129 @end table
5130
5131 @node ImageMagick Images
5132 @subsection ImageMagick Images
5133 @cindex ImageMagick images
5134 @cindex images, support for more formats
5135
5136 If you build Emacs with ImageMagick support, you can use the
5137 ImageMagick library to load many image formats (@pxref{File
5138 Conveniences,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}). The image type symbol
5139 for images loaded via ImageMagick is @code{imagemagick}, regardless of
5140 the actual underlying image format.
5141
5142 @defun imagemagick-types
5143 This function returns a list of image file extensions supported by the
5144 current ImageMagick installation. Each list element is a symbol
5145 representing an internal ImageMagick name for an image type, such as
5146 @code{BMP} for @file{.bmp} images.
5147 @end defun
5148
5149 @defopt imagemagick-enabled-types
5150 The value of this variable is a list of ImageMagick image types which
5151 Emacs may attempt to render using ImageMagick. Each list element
5152 should be one of the symbols in the list returned by
5153 @code{imagemagick-types}, or an equivalent string. Alternatively, a
5154 value of @code{t} enables ImageMagick for all possible image types.
5155 Regardless of the value of this variable,
5156 @code{imagemagick-types-inhibit} (see below) takes precedence.
5157 @end defopt
5158
5159 @defopt imagemagick-types-inhibit
5160 The value of this variable lists the ImageMagick image types which
5161 should never be rendered using ImageMagick, regardless of the value of
5162 @code{imagemagick-enabled-types}. A value of @code{t} disables
5163 ImageMagick entirely.
5164 @end defopt
5165
5166 @defvar image-format-suffixes
5167 This variable is an alist mapping image types to file name extensions.
5168 Emacs uses this in conjunction with the @code{:format} image property
5169 (see below) to give a hint to the ImageMagick library as to the type
5170 of an image. Each element has the form @code{(@var{type}
5171 @var{extension})}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying an image
5172 content-type, and @var{extension} is a string that specifies the
5173 associated file name extension.
5174 @end defvar
5175
5176 Images loaded with ImageMagick support the following additional
5177 image descriptor properties:
5178
5179 @table @code
5180 @item :background @var{background}
5181 @var{background}, if non-@code{nil}, should be a string specifying a
5182 color, which is used as the image's background color if the image
5183 supports transparency. If the value is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5184 frame's background color.
5185
5186 @item :width @var{width}, :height @var{height}
5187 The @code{:width} and @code{:height} keywords are used for scaling the
5188 image. If only one of them is specified, the other one will be
5189 calculated so as to preserve the aspect ratio. If both are specified,
5190 aspect ratio may not be preserved.
5191
5192 @item :max-width @var{max-width}, :max-height @var{max-height}
5193 The @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} keywords are used for
5194 scaling if the size of the image of the image exceeds these values.
5195 If @code{:width} is set it will have precedence over @code{max-width},
5196 and if @code{:height} is set it will have precedence over
5197 @code{max-height}, but you can otherwise mix these keywords as you
5198 wish. @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} will always preserve
5199 the aspect ratio.
5200
5201 @item :format @var{type}
5202 The value, @var{type}, should be a symbol specifying the type of the
5203 image data, as found in @code{image-format-suffixes}. This is used
5204 when the image does not have an associated file name, to provide a
5205 hint to ImageMagick to help it detect the image type.
5206
5207 @item :rotation @var{angle}
5208 Specifies a rotation angle in degrees.
5209
5210 @item :index @var{frame}
5211 @c Doesn't work: http://debbugs.gnu.org/7978
5212 @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5213 @end table
5214
5215 @node Other Image Types
5216 @subsection Other Image Types
5217 @cindex PBM
5218
5219 For PBM images, specify image type @code{pbm}. Color, gray-scale and
5220 monochromatic images are supported. For mono PBM images, two additional
5221 image properties are supported.
5222
5223 @table @code
5224 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5225 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5226 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5227 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5228 foreground color.
5229
5230 @item :background @var{background}
5231 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5232 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5233 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5234 background color.
5235 @end table
5236
5237 @noindent
5238 The remaining image types that Emacs can support are:
5239
5240 @table @asis
5241 @item GIF
5242 Image type @code{gif}.
5243 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5244
5245 @item JPEG
5246 Image type @code{jpeg}.
5247
5248 @item PNG
5249 Image type @code{png}.
5250
5251 @item SVG
5252 Image type @code{svg}.
5253
5254 @item TIFF
5255 Image type @code{tiff}.
5256 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5257 @end table
5258
5259 @node Defining Images
5260 @subsection Defining Images
5261 @cindex define image
5262
5263 The functions @code{create-image}, @code{defimage} and
5264 @code{find-image} provide convenient ways to create image descriptors.
5265
5266 @defun create-image file-or-data &optional type data-p &rest props
5267 This function creates and returns an image descriptor which uses the
5268 data in @var{file-or-data}. @var{file-or-data} can be a file name or
5269 a string containing the image data; @var{data-p} should be @code{nil}
5270 for the former case, non-@code{nil} for the latter case.
5271
5272 The optional argument @var{type} is a symbol specifying the image type.
5273 If @var{type} is omitted or @code{nil}, @code{create-image} tries to
5274 determine the image type from the file's first few bytes, or else
5275 from the file's name.
5276
5277 The remaining arguments, @var{props}, specify additional image
5278 properties---for example,
5279
5280 @c ':heuristic-mask' is not documented?
5281 @example
5282 (create-image "foo.xpm" 'xpm nil :heuristic-mask t)
5283 @end example
5284
5285 The function returns @code{nil} if images of this type are not
5286 supported. Otherwise it returns an image descriptor.
5287 @end defun
5288
5289 @defmac defimage symbol specs &optional doc
5290 This macro defines @var{symbol} as an image name. The arguments
5291 @var{specs} is a list which specifies how to display the image.
5292 The third argument, @var{doc}, is an optional documentation string.
5293
5294 Each argument in @var{specs} has the form of a property list, and each
5295 one should specify at least the @code{:type} property and either the
5296 @code{:file} or the @code{:data} property. The value of @code{:type}
5297 should be a symbol specifying the image type, the value of
5298 @code{:file} is the file to load the image from, and the value of
5299 @code{:data} is a string containing the actual image data. Here is an
5300 example:
5301
5302 @example
5303 (defimage test-image
5304 ((:type xpm :file "~/test1.xpm")
5305 (:type xbm :file "~/test1.xbm")))
5306 @end example
5307
5308 @code{defimage} tests each argument, one by one, to see if it is
5309 usable---that is, if the type is supported and the file exists. The
5310 first usable argument is used to make an image descriptor which is
5311 stored in @var{symbol}.
5312
5313 If none of the alternatives will work, then @var{symbol} is defined
5314 as @code{nil}.
5315 @end defmac
5316
5317 @defun find-image specs
5318 This function provides a convenient way to find an image satisfying one
5319 of a list of image specifications @var{specs}.
5320
5321 Each specification in @var{specs} is a property list with contents
5322 depending on image type. All specifications must at least contain the
5323 properties @code{:type @var{type}} and either @w{@code{:file @var{file}}}
5324 or @w{@code{:data @var{data}}}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying
5325 the image type, e.g., @code{xbm}, @var{file} is the file to load the
5326 image from, and @var{data} is a string containing the actual image data.
5327 The first specification in the list whose @var{type} is supported, and
5328 @var{file} exists, is used to construct the image specification to be
5329 returned. If no specification is satisfied, @code{nil} is returned.
5330
5331 The image is looked for in @code{image-load-path}.
5332 @end defun
5333
5334 @defopt image-load-path
5335 This variable's value is a list of locations in which to search for
5336 image files. If an element is a string or a variable symbol whose
5337 value is a string, the string is taken to be the name of a directory
5338 to search. If an element is a variable symbol whose value is a list,
5339 that is taken to be a list of directory names to search.
5340
5341 The default is to search in the @file{images} subdirectory of the
5342 directory specified by @code{data-directory}, then the directory
5343 specified by @code{data-directory}, and finally in the directories in
5344 @code{load-path}. Subdirectories are not automatically included in
5345 the search, so if you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to
5346 supply the subdirectory name explicitly. For example, to find the
5347 image @file{images/foo/bar.xpm} within @code{data-directory}, you
5348 should specify the image as follows:
5349
5350 @example
5351 (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
5352 @end example
5353 @end defopt
5354
5355 @defun image-load-path-for-library library image &optional path no-error
5356 This function returns a suitable search path for images used by the
5357 Lisp package @var{library}.
5358
5359 The function searches for @var{image} first using @code{image-load-path},
5360 excluding @file{@code{data-directory}/images}, and then in
5361 @code{load-path}, followed by a path suitable for @var{library}, which
5362 includes @file{../../etc/images} and @file{../etc/images} relative to
5363 the library file itself, and finally in
5364 @file{@code{data-directory}/images}.
5365
5366 Then this function returns a list of directories which contains first
5367 the directory in which @var{image} was found, followed by the value of
5368 @code{load-path}. If @var{path} is given, it is used instead of
5369 @code{load-path}.
5370
5371 If @var{no-error} is non-@code{nil} and a suitable path can't be
5372 found, don't signal an error. Instead, return a list of directories as
5373 before, except that @code{nil} appears in place of the image directory.
5374
5375 Here is an example of using @code{image-load-path-for-library}:
5376
5377 @example
5378 (defvar image-load-path) ; shush compiler
5379 (let* ((load-path (image-load-path-for-library
5380 "mh-e" "mh-logo.xpm"))
5381 (image-load-path (cons (car load-path)
5382 image-load-path)))
5383 (mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons-init))
5384 @end example
5385 @end defun
5386
5387 @node Showing Images
5388 @subsection Showing Images
5389 @cindex show image
5390
5391 You can use an image descriptor by setting up the @code{display}
5392 property yourself, but it is easier to use the functions in this
5393 section.
5394
5395 @defun insert-image image &optional string area slice
5396 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point. The
5397 value @var{image} should be an image descriptor; it could be a value
5398 returned by @code{create-image}, or the value of a symbol defined with
5399 @code{defimage}. The argument @var{string} specifies the text to put
5400 in the buffer to hold the image. If it is omitted or @code{nil},
5401 @code{insert-image} uses @code{" "} by default.
5402
5403 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5404 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5405 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5406 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5407 buffer's text.
5408
5409 The argument @var{slice} specifies a slice of the image to insert. If
5410 @var{slice} is @code{nil} or omitted the whole image is inserted.
5411 Otherwise, @var{slice} is a list @code{(@var{x} @var{y} @var{width}
5412 @var{height})} which specifies the @var{x} and @var{y} positions and
5413 @var{width} and @var{height} of the image area to insert. Integer
5414 values are in units of pixels. A floating-point number in the range
5415 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height of the entire
5416 image.
5417
5418 Internally, this function inserts @var{string} in the buffer, and gives
5419 it a @code{display} property which specifies @var{image}. @xref{Display
5420 Property}.
5421 @end defun
5422
5423 @cindex slice, image
5424 @cindex image slice
5425 @defun insert-sliced-image image &optional string area rows cols
5426 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point, like
5427 @code{insert-image}, but splits the image into @var{rows}x@var{cols}
5428 equally sized slices.
5429
5430 Emacs displays each slice as a
5431 separate image, and allows more intuitive scrolling up/down, instead of
5432 jumping up/down the entire image when paging through a buffer that
5433 displays (large) images.
5434 @end defun
5435
5436 @defun put-image image pos &optional string area
5437 This function puts image @var{image} in front of @var{pos} in the
5438 current buffer. The argument @var{pos} should be an integer or a
5439 marker. It specifies the buffer position where the image should appear.
5440 The argument @var{string} specifies the text that should hold the image
5441 as an alternative to the default.
5442
5443 The argument @var{image} must be an image descriptor, perhaps returned
5444 by @code{create-image} or stored by @code{defimage}.
5445
5446 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5447 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5448 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5449 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5450 buffer's text.
5451
5452 Internally, this function creates an overlay, and gives it a
5453 @code{before-string} property containing text that has a @code{display}
5454 property whose value is the image. (Whew!)
5455 @end defun
5456
5457 @defun remove-images start end &optional buffer
5458 This function removes images in @var{buffer} between positions
5459 @var{start} and @var{end}. If @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil},
5460 images are removed from the current buffer.
5461
5462 This removes only images that were put into @var{buffer} the way
5463 @code{put-image} does it, not images that were inserted with
5464 @code{insert-image} or in other ways.
5465 @end defun
5466
5467 @defun image-size spec &optional pixels frame
5468 @cindex size of image
5469 This function returns the size of an image as a pair
5470 @w{@code{(@var{width} . @var{height})}}. @var{spec} is an image
5471 specification. @var{pixels} non-@code{nil} means return sizes measured
5472 in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in the default character size
5473 of @var{frame} (@pxref{Frame Font}). @var{frame} is the frame on which
5474 the image will be displayed. @var{frame} null or omitted means use the
5475 selected frame (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5476 @end defun
5477
5478 @defvar max-image-size
5479 This variable is used to define the maximum size of image that Emacs
5480 will load. Emacs will refuse to load (and display) any image that is
5481 larger than this limit.
5482
5483 If the value is an integer, it directly specifies the maximum
5484 image height and width, measured in pixels. If it is floating
5485 point, it specifies the maximum image height and width
5486 as a ratio to the frame height and width. If the value is
5487 non-numeric, there is no explicit limit on the size of images.
5488
5489 The purpose of this variable is to prevent unreasonably large images
5490 from accidentally being loaded into Emacs. It only takes effect the
5491 first time an image is loaded. Once an image is placed in the image
5492 cache, it can always be displayed, even if the value of
5493 @code{max-image-size} is subsequently changed (@pxref{Image Cache}).
5494 @end defvar
5495
5496 @node Multi-Frame Images
5497 @subsection Multi-Frame Images
5498 @cindex multi-frame images
5499
5500 @cindex animation
5501 @cindex image animation
5502 @cindex image frames
5503 Some image files can contain more than one image. We say that there
5504 are multiple ``frames'' in the image. At present, Emacs supports
5505 multiple frames for GIF, TIFF, and certain ImageMagick formats such as
5506 DJVM@.
5507
5508 The frames can be used either to represent multiple pages (this is
5509 usually the case with multi-frame TIFF files, for example), or to
5510 create animation (usually the case with multi-frame GIF files).
5511
5512 A multi-frame image has a property @code{:index}, whose value is an
5513 integer (counting from 0) that specifies which frame is being displayed.
5514
5515 @defun image-multi-frame-p image
5516 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{image} contains more than
5517 one frame. The actual return value is a cons @code{(@var{nimages}
5518 . @var{delay})}, where @var{nimages} is the number of frames and
5519 @var{delay} is the delay in seconds between them, or @code{nil}
5520 if the image does not specify a delay. Images that are intended to be
5521 animated usually specify a frame delay, whereas ones that are intended
5522 to be treated as multiple pages do not.
5523 @end defun
5524
5525 @defun image-current-frame image
5526 This function returns the index of the current frame number for
5527 @var{image}, counting from 0.
5528 @end defun
5529
5530 @defun image-show-frame image n &optional nocheck
5531 This function switches @var{image} to frame number @var{n}. It
5532 replaces a frame number outside the valid range with that of the end
5533 of the range, unless @var{nocheck} is non-@code{nil}. If @var{image}
5534 does not contain a frame with the specified number, the image displays
5535 as a hollow box.
5536 @end defun
5537
5538 @defun image-animate image &optional index limit
5539 This function animates @var{image}. The optional integer @var{index}
5540 specifies the frame from which to start (default 0). The optional
5541 argument @var{limit} controls the length of the animation. If omitted
5542 or @code{nil}, the image animates once only; if @code{t} it loops
5543 forever; if a number animation stops after that many seconds.
5544 @end defun
5545
5546 @vindex image-minimum-frame-delay
5547 @vindex image-default-frame-delay
5548 @noindent Animation operates by means of a timer. Note that Emacs imposes a
5549 minimum frame delay of 0.01 (@code{image-minimum-frame-delay}) seconds.
5550 If the image itself does not specify a delay, Emacs uses
5551 @code{image-default-frame-delay}.
5552
5553 @defun image-animate-timer image
5554 This function returns the timer responsible for animating @var{image},
5555 if there is one.
5556 @end defun
5557
5558
5559 @node Image Cache
5560 @subsection Image Cache
5561 @cindex image cache
5562
5563 Emacs caches images so that it can display them again more
5564 efficiently. When Emacs displays an image, it searches the image
5565 cache for an existing image specification @code{equal} to the desired
5566 specification. If a match is found, the image is displayed from the
5567 cache. Otherwise, Emacs loads the image normally.
5568
5569 @defun image-flush spec &optional frame
5570 This function removes the image with specification @var{spec} from the
5571 image cache of frame @var{frame}. Image specifications are compared
5572 using @code{equal}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5573 selected frame. If @var{frame} is @code{t}, the image is flushed on
5574 all existing frames.
5575
5576 In Emacs's current implementation, each graphical terminal possesses an
5577 image cache, which is shared by all the frames on that terminal
5578 (@pxref{Multiple Terminals}). Thus, refreshing an image in one frame
5579 also refreshes it in all other frames on the same terminal.
5580 @end defun
5581
5582 One use for @code{image-flush} is to tell Emacs about a change in an
5583 image file. If an image specification contains a @code{:file}
5584 property, the image is cached based on the file's contents when the
5585 image is first displayed. Even if the file subsequently changes,
5586 Emacs continues displaying the old version of the image. Calling
5587 @code{image-flush} flushes the image from the cache, forcing Emacs to
5588 re-read the file the next time it needs to display that image.
5589
5590 Another use for @code{image-flush} is for memory conservation. If
5591 your Lisp program creates a large number of temporary images over a
5592 period much shorter than @code{image-cache-eviction-delay} (see
5593 below), you can opt to flush unused images yourself, instead of
5594 waiting for Emacs to do it automatically.
5595
5596 @defun clear-image-cache &optional filter
5597 This function clears an image cache, removing all the images stored in
5598 it. If @var{filter} is omitted or @code{nil}, it clears the cache for
5599 the selected frame. If @var{filter} is a frame, it clears the cache
5600 for that frame. If @var{filter} is @code{t}, all image caches are
5601 cleared. Otherwise, @var{filter} is taken to be a file name, and all
5602 images associated with that file name are removed from all image
5603 caches.
5604 @end defun
5605
5606 If an image in the image cache has not been displayed for a specified
5607 period of time, Emacs removes it from the cache and frees the
5608 associated memory.
5609
5610 @defvar image-cache-eviction-delay
5611 This variable specifies the number of seconds an image can remain in
5612 the cache without being displayed. When an image is not displayed for
5613 this length of time, Emacs removes it from the image cache.
5614
5615 Under some circumstances, if the number of images in the cache grows
5616 too large, the actual eviction delay may be shorter than this.
5617
5618 If the value is @code{nil}, Emacs does not remove images from the cache
5619 except when you explicitly clear it. This mode can be useful for
5620 debugging.
5621 @end defvar
5622
5623 @node Xwidgets
5624 @section Embedded Native Widgets
5625 @cindex xwidget
5626 @cindex embedded widgets
5627 @cindex webkit browser widget
5628
5629 Emacs is able to display native widgets, such as GTK WebKit widgets,
5630 in Emacs buffers when it was built with the necessary support
5631 libraries and is running on a graphical terminal. To test whether
5632 Emacs supports display of embedded widgets, check that the
5633 @code{xwidget-internal} feature is available (@pxref{Named Features}).
5634
5635 To display an embedded widget in a buffer, you must first create an
5636 xwidget object, and then use that object as the display specifier
5637 in a @code{display} text or overlay property (@pxref{Display
5638 Property}).
5639
5640 @defun make-xwidget beg end type title width height arguments &optional buffer
5641 This creates an xwidget object between @var{beg} and @var{end}, buffer
5642 positions in @var{buffer}, and returns the new object. If
5643 @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current
5644 buffer. If @var{buffer} names a buffer that doesn't exist, it will be
5645 created. The @var{type} identifies the type of the xwidget component,
5646 it can be one of the following:
5647
5648 @table @code
5649 @item webkit-osr
5650 The WebKit OSR (@dfn{on-stack replacement}) component.
5651 @end table
5652
5653 The @var{width} and @var{height} arguments specify the widget size in
5654 pixels, and @var{title}, a string, specifies its title.
5655 @end defun
5656
5657 @defun xwidgetp object
5658 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an xwidget,
5659 @code{nil} otherwise.
5660 @end defun
5661
5662 @defun xwidget-plist xwidget
5663 This function returns the property list of @var{xwidget}.
5664 @end defun
5665
5666 @defun set-xwidget-plist xwidget plist
5667 This function replaces the property list of @var{xwidget} with a new
5668 property list given by @var{plist}.
5669 @end defun
5670
5671 @defun xwidget-buffer xwidget
5672 This function returns the buffer of @var{xwidget}.
5673 @end defun
5674
5675 @defun get-buffer-xwidgets buffer
5676 This function returns a list of xwidget objects associated with the
5677 @var{buffer}, which can be specified as a buffer object or a name of
5678 an existing buffer, a string. The value is @code{nil} if @var{buffer}
5679 contains no xwidgets.
5680 @end defun
5681
5682 @defun xwidget-webkit-goto-uri xwidget uri
5683 This function browses the specified @var{uri} in the given
5684 @var{xwidget}. The @var{uri} is a string that specifies the name of a
5685 file or a URL. @c FIXME: What else can a URI specify in this context?
5686 @end defun
5687
5688 @defun xwidget-webkit-execute-script xwidget script
5689 This function causes the browser widget specified by @var{xwidget} to
5690 execute the specified JavaScript @code{script}.
5691 @end defun
5692
5693 @defun xwidget-webkit-execute-script-rv xwidget script &optional default
5694 This function executes the specified @var{script} like
5695 @code{xwidget-webkit-execute-script} does, but it also returns the
5696 script's return value as a string. If @var{script} doesn't return a
5697 value, this function returns @var{default}, or @code{nil} if
5698 @var{default} was omitted.
5699 @end defun
5700
5701 @defun xwidget-webkit-get-title xwidget
5702 This function returns the title of @var{xwidget} as a string.
5703 @end defun
5704
5705 @defun xwidget-resize xwidget width height
5706 This function resizes the specified @var{xwidget} to the size
5707 @var{width}x@var{height} pixels.
5708 @end defun
5709
5710 @defun xwidget-size-request xwidget
5711 This function returns the desired size of @var{xwidget} as a list of
5712 the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height})}. The dimensions are in
5713 pixels.
5714 @end defun
5715
5716 @defun xwidget-info xwidget
5717 This function returns the attributes of @var{xwidget} as a vector of
5718 the form @code{[@var{type} @var{title} @var{width} @var{height}]}.
5719 The attributes are usually determined by @code{make-xwidget} when the
5720 xwidget is created.
5721 @end defun
5722
5723 @defun set-xwidget-query-on-exit-flag xwidget flag
5724 This function allows you to arrange that Emacs will ask the user for
5725 confirmation before exiting or before killing a buffer that has
5726 @var{xwidget} associated with it. If @var{flag} is non-@code{nil},
5727 Emacs will query the user, otherwise it will not.
5728 @end defun
5729
5730 @defun xwidget-query-on-exit-flag xwidget
5731 This function returns the current setting of @var{xwidget}s
5732 query-on-exit flag, either @code{t} or @code{nil}.
5733 @end defun
5734
5735 @node Buttons
5736 @section Buttons
5737 @cindex buttons in buffers
5738 @cindex clickable buttons in buffers
5739
5740 The Button package defines functions for inserting and manipulating
5741 @dfn{buttons} that can be activated with the mouse or via keyboard
5742 commands. These buttons are typically used for various kinds of
5743 hyperlinks.
5744
5745 A button is essentially a set of text or overlay properties,
5746 attached to a stretch of text in a buffer. These properties are
5747 called @dfn{button properties}. One of these properties, the
5748 @dfn{action property}, specifies a function which is called when the
5749 user invokes the button using the keyboard or the mouse. The action
5750 function may examine the button and use its other properties as
5751 desired.
5752
5753 In some ways, the Button package duplicates the functionality in the
5754 Widget package. @xref{Top, , Introduction, widget, The Emacs Widget
5755 Library}. The advantage of the Button package is that it is faster,
5756 smaller, and simpler to program. From the point of view of the user,
5757 the interfaces produced by the two packages are very similar.
5758
5759 @menu
5760 * Button Properties:: Button properties with special meanings.
5761 * Button Types:: Defining common properties for classes of buttons.
5762 * Making Buttons:: Adding buttons to Emacs buffers.
5763 * Manipulating Buttons:: Getting and setting properties of buttons.
5764 * Button Buffer Commands:: Buffer-wide commands and bindings for buttons.
5765 @end menu
5766
5767 @node Button Properties
5768 @subsection Button Properties
5769 @cindex button properties
5770
5771 Each button has an associated list of properties defining its
5772 appearance and behavior, and other arbitrary properties may be used
5773 for application specific purposes. The following properties have
5774 special meaning to the Button package:
5775
5776 @table @code
5777 @item action
5778 @kindex action @r{(button property)}
5779 The function to call when the user invokes the button, which is passed
5780 the single argument @var{button}. By default this is @code{ignore},
5781 which does nothing.
5782
5783 @item mouse-action
5784 @kindex mouse-action @r{(button property)}
5785 This is similar to @code{action}, and when present, will be used
5786 instead of @code{action} for button invocations resulting from
5787 mouse-clicks (instead of the user hitting @key{RET}). If not
5788 present, mouse-clicks use @code{action} instead.
5789
5790 @item face
5791 @kindex face @r{(button property)}
5792 This is an Emacs face controlling how buttons of this type are
5793 displayed; by default this is the @code{button} face.
5794
5795 @item mouse-face
5796 @kindex mouse-face @r{(button property)}
5797 This is an additional face which controls appearance during
5798 mouse-overs (merged with the usual button face); by default this is
5799 the usual Emacs @code{highlight} face.
5800
5801 @item keymap
5802 @kindex keymap @r{(button property)}
5803 The button's keymap, defining bindings active within the button
5804 region. By default this is the usual button region keymap, stored
5805 in the variable @code{button-map}, which defines @key{RET} and
5806 @key{mouse-2} to invoke the button.
5807
5808 @item type
5809 @kindex type @r{(button property)}
5810 The button type. @xref{Button Types}.
5811
5812 @item help-echo
5813 @kindex help-index @r{(button property)}
5814 A string displayed by the Emacs tool-tip help system; by default,
5815 @code{"mouse-2, RET: Push this button"}.
5816
5817 @item follow-link
5818 @kindex follow-link @r{(button property)}
5819 The follow-link property, defining how a @key{Mouse-1} click behaves
5820 on this button, @xref{Clickable Text}.
5821
5822 @item button
5823 @kindex button @r{(button property)}
5824 All buttons have a non-@code{nil} @code{button} property, which may be useful
5825 in finding regions of text that comprise buttons (which is what the
5826 standard button functions do).
5827 @end table
5828
5829 There are other properties defined for the regions of text in a
5830 button, but these are not generally interesting for typical uses.
5831
5832 @node Button Types
5833 @subsection Button Types
5834 @cindex button types
5835
5836 Every button has a @dfn{button type}, which defines default values
5837 for the button's properties. Button types are arranged in a
5838 hierarchy, with specialized types inheriting from more general types,
5839 so that it's easy to define special-purpose types of buttons for
5840 specific tasks.
5841
5842 @defun define-button-type name &rest properties
5843 Define a button type called @var{name} (a symbol).
5844 The remaining arguments
5845 form a sequence of @var{property value} pairs, specifying default
5846 property values for buttons with this type (a button's type may be set
5847 by giving it a @code{type} property when creating the button, using
5848 the @code{:type} keyword argument).
5849
5850 In addition, the keyword argument @code{:supertype} may be used to
5851 specify a button-type from which @var{name} inherits its default
5852 property values. Note that this inheritance happens only when
5853 @var{name} is defined; subsequent changes to a supertype are not
5854 reflected in its subtypes.
5855 @end defun
5856
5857 Using @code{define-button-type} to define default properties for
5858 buttons is not necessary---buttons without any specified type use the
5859 built-in button-type @code{button}---but it is encouraged, since
5860 doing so usually makes the resulting code clearer and more efficient.
5861
5862 @node Making Buttons
5863 @subsection Making Buttons
5864 @cindex making buttons
5865
5866 Buttons are associated with a region of text, using an overlay or
5867 text properties to hold button-specific information, all of which are
5868 initialized from the button's type (which defaults to the built-in
5869 button type @code{button}). Like all Emacs text, the appearance of
5870 the button is governed by the @code{face} property; by default (via
5871 the @code{face} property inherited from the @code{button} button-type)
5872 this is a simple underline, like a typical web-page link.
5873
5874 For convenience, there are two sorts of button-creation functions,
5875 those that add button properties to an existing region of a buffer,
5876 called @code{make-...button}, and those that also insert the button
5877 text, called @code{insert-...button}.
5878
5879 The button-creation functions all take the @code{&rest} argument
5880 @var{properties}, which should be a sequence of @var{property value}
5881 pairs, specifying properties to add to the button; see @ref{Button
5882 Properties}. In addition, the keyword argument @code{:type} may be
5883 used to specify a button-type from which to inherit other properties;
5884 see @ref{Button Types}. Any properties not explicitly specified
5885 during creation will be inherited from the button's type (if the type
5886 defines such a property).
5887
5888 The following functions add a button using an overlay
5889 (@pxref{Overlays}) to hold the button properties:
5890
5891 @defun make-button beg end &rest properties
5892 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the
5893 current buffer, and returns it.
5894 @end defun
5895
5896 @defun insert-button label &rest properties
5897 This insert a button with the label @var{label} at point,
5898 and returns it.
5899 @end defun
5900
5901 The following functions are similar, but using text properties
5902 (@pxref{Text Properties}) to hold the button properties. Such buttons
5903 do not add markers to the buffer, so editing in the buffer does not
5904 slow down if there is an extremely large numbers of buttons. However,
5905 if there is an existing face text property on the text (e.g., a face
5906 assigned by Font Lock mode), the button face may not be visible. Both
5907 of these functions return the starting position of the new button.
5908
5909 @defun make-text-button beg end &rest properties
5910 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the current buffer,
5911 using text properties.
5912 @end defun
5913
5914 @defun insert-text-button label &rest properties
5915 This inserts a button with the label @var{label} at point, using text
5916 properties.
5917 @end defun
5918
5919 @node Manipulating Buttons
5920 @subsection Manipulating Buttons
5921 @cindex manipulating buttons
5922
5923 These are functions for getting and setting properties of buttons.
5924 Often these are used by a button's invocation function to determine
5925 what to do.
5926
5927 Where a @var{button} parameter is specified, it means an object
5928 referring to a specific button, either an overlay (for overlay
5929 buttons), or a buffer-position or marker (for text property buttons).
5930 Such an object is passed as the first argument to a button's
5931 invocation function when it is invoked.
5932
5933 @defun button-start button
5934 Return the position at which @var{button} starts.
5935 @end defun
5936
5937 @defun button-end button
5938 Return the position at which @var{button} ends.
5939 @end defun
5940
5941 @defun button-get button prop
5942 Get the property of button @var{button} named @var{prop}.
5943 @end defun
5944
5945 @defun button-put button prop val
5946 Set @var{button}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
5947 @end defun
5948
5949 @defun button-activate button &optional use-mouse-action
5950 Call @var{button}'s @code{action} property (i.e., invoke the function
5951 that is the value of that property, passing it the single argument
5952 @var{button}). If @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, try to
5953 invoke the button's @code{mouse-action} property instead of
5954 @code{action}; if the button has no @code{mouse-action} property, use
5955 @code{action} as normal.
5956 @end defun
5957
5958 @defun button-label button
5959 Return @var{button}'s text label.
5960 @end defun
5961
5962 @defun button-type button
5963 Return @var{button}'s button-type.
5964 @end defun
5965
5966 @defun button-has-type-p button type
5967 Return @code{t} if @var{button} has button-type @var{type}, or one of
5968 @var{type}'s subtypes.
5969 @end defun
5970
5971 @defun button-at pos
5972 Return the button at position @var{pos} in the current buffer, or
5973 @code{nil}. If the button at @var{pos} is a text property button, the
5974 return value is a marker pointing to @var{pos}.
5975 @end defun
5976
5977 @defun button-type-put type prop val
5978 Set the button-type @var{type}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
5979 @end defun
5980
5981 @defun button-type-get type prop
5982 Get the property of button-type @var{type} named @var{prop}.
5983 @end defun
5984
5985 @defun button-type-subtype-p type supertype
5986 Return @code{t} if button-type @var{type} is a subtype of @var{supertype}.
5987 @end defun
5988
5989 @node Button Buffer Commands
5990 @subsection Button Buffer Commands
5991 @cindex button buffer commands
5992
5993 These are commands and functions for locating and operating on
5994 buttons in an Emacs buffer.
5995
5996 @code{push-button} is the command that a user uses to actually push
5997 a button, and is bound by default in the button itself to @key{RET}
5998 and to @key{mouse-2} using a local keymap in the button's overlay or
5999 text properties. Commands that are useful outside the buttons itself,
6000 such as @code{forward-button} and @code{backward-button} are
6001 additionally available in the keymap stored in
6002 @code{button-buffer-map}; a mode which uses buttons may want to use
6003 @code{button-buffer-map} as a parent keymap for its keymap.
6004
6005 If the button has a non-@code{nil} @code{follow-link} property, and
6006 @code{mouse-1-click-follows-link} is set, a quick @key{Mouse-1} click
6007 will also activate the @code{push-button} command.
6008 @xref{Clickable Text}.
6009
6010 @deffn Command push-button &optional pos use-mouse-action
6011 Perform the action specified by a button at location @var{pos}.
6012 @var{pos} may be either a buffer position or a mouse-event. If
6013 @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, or @var{pos} is a
6014 mouse-event (@pxref{Mouse Events}), try to invoke the button's
6015 @code{mouse-action} property instead of @code{action}; if the button
6016 has no @code{mouse-action} property, use @code{action} as normal.
6017 @var{pos} defaults to point, except when @code{push-button} is invoked
6018 interactively as the result of a mouse-event, in which case, the mouse
6019 event's position is used. If there's no button at @var{pos}, do
6020 nothing and return @code{nil}, otherwise return @code{t}.
6021 @end deffn
6022
6023 @deffn Command forward-button n &optional wrap display-message
6024 Move to the @var{n}th next button, or @var{n}th previous button if
6025 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
6026 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
6027 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
6028 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
6029 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
6030 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
6031 @end deffn
6032
6033 @deffn Command backward-button n &optional wrap display-message
6034 Move to the @var{n}th previous button, or @var{n}th next button if
6035 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
6036 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
6037 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
6038 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
6039 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
6040 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
6041 @end deffn
6042
6043 @defun next-button pos &optional count-current
6044 @defunx previous-button pos &optional count-current
6045 Return the next button after (for @code{next-button}) or before (for
6046 @code{previous-button}) position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If
6047 @var{count-current} is non-@code{nil}, count any button at @var{pos}
6048 in the search, instead of starting at the next button.
6049 @end defun
6050
6051 @node Abstract Display
6052 @section Abstract Display
6053 @cindex ewoc
6054 @cindex display, abstract
6055 @cindex display, arbitrary objects
6056 @cindex model/view/controller
6057 @cindex view part, model/view/controller
6058
6059 The Ewoc package constructs buffer text that represents a structure
6060 of Lisp objects, and updates the text to follow changes in that
6061 structure. This is like the ``view'' component in the
6062 ``model--view--controller'' design paradigm. Ewoc means ``Emacs's
6063 Widget for Object Collections''.
6064
6065 An @dfn{ewoc} is a structure that organizes information required to
6066 construct buffer text that represents certain Lisp data. The buffer
6067 text of the ewoc has three parts, in order: first, fixed @dfn{header}
6068 text; next, textual descriptions of a series of data elements (Lisp
6069 objects that you specify); and last, fixed @dfn{footer} text.
6070 Specifically, an ewoc contains information on:
6071
6072 @itemize @bullet
6073 @item
6074 The buffer which its text is generated in.
6075
6076 @item
6077 The text's start position in the buffer.
6078
6079 @item
6080 The header and footer strings.
6081
6082 @item
6083 @cindex node, ewoc
6084 @c or "@cindex node, abstract display"?
6085 A doubly-linked chain of @dfn{nodes}, each of which contains:
6086
6087 @itemize
6088 @item
6089 A @dfn{data element}, a single Lisp object.
6090
6091 @item
6092 Links to the preceding and following nodes in the chain.
6093 @end itemize
6094
6095 @item
6096 A @dfn{pretty-printer} function which is responsible for
6097 inserting the textual representation of a data
6098 element value into the current buffer.
6099 @end itemize
6100
6101 Typically, you define an ewoc with @code{ewoc-create}, and then pass
6102 the resulting ewoc structure to other functions in the Ewoc package to
6103 build nodes within it, and display it in the buffer. Once it is
6104 displayed in the buffer, other functions determine the correspondence
6105 between buffer positions and nodes, move point from one node's textual
6106 representation to another, and so forth. @xref{Abstract Display
6107 Functions}.
6108
6109 @cindex encapsulation, ewoc
6110 @c or "@cindex encapsulation, abstract display"?
6111 A node @dfn{encapsulates} a data element much the way a variable
6112 holds a value. Normally, encapsulation occurs as a part of adding a
6113 node to the ewoc. You can retrieve the data element value and place a
6114 new value in its place, like so:
6115
6116 @lisp
6117 (ewoc-data @var{node})
6118 @result{} value
6119
6120 (ewoc-set-data @var{node} @var{new-value})
6121 @result{} @var{new-value}
6122 @end lisp
6123
6124 @noindent
6125 You can also use, as the data element value, a Lisp object (list or
6126 vector) that is a container for the real value, or an index into
6127 some other structure. The example (@pxref{Abstract Display Example})
6128 uses the latter approach.
6129
6130 When the data changes, you will want to update the text in the
6131 buffer. You can update all nodes by calling @code{ewoc-refresh}, or
6132 just specific nodes using @code{ewoc-invalidate}, or all nodes
6133 satisfying a predicate using @code{ewoc-map}. Alternatively, you can
6134 delete invalid nodes using @code{ewoc-delete} or @code{ewoc-filter},
6135 and add new nodes in their place. Deleting a node from an ewoc deletes
6136 its associated textual description from buffer, as well.
6137
6138 @menu
6139 * Abstract Display Functions:: Functions in the Ewoc package.
6140 * Abstract Display Example:: Example of using Ewoc.
6141 @end menu
6142
6143 @node Abstract Display Functions
6144 @subsection Abstract Display Functions
6145
6146 In this subsection, @var{ewoc} and @var{node} stand for the
6147 structures described above (@pxref{Abstract Display}), while
6148 @var{data} stands for an arbitrary Lisp object used as a data element.
6149
6150 @defun ewoc-create pretty-printer &optional header footer nosep
6151 This constructs and returns a new ewoc, with no nodes (and thus no data
6152 elements). @var{pretty-printer} should be a function that takes one
6153 argument, a data element of the sort you plan to use in this ewoc, and
6154 inserts its textual description at point using @code{insert} (and never
6155 @code{insert-before-markers}, because that would interfere with the
6156 Ewoc package's internal mechanisms).
6157
6158 Normally, a newline is automatically inserted after the header,
6159 the footer and every node's textual description. If @var{nosep}
6160 is non-@code{nil}, no newline is inserted. This may be useful for
6161 displaying an entire ewoc on a single line, for example, or for
6162 making nodes invisible by arranging for @var{pretty-printer}
6163 to do nothing for those nodes.
6164
6165 An ewoc maintains its text in the buffer that is current when
6166 you create it, so switch to the intended buffer before calling
6167 @code{ewoc-create}.
6168 @end defun
6169
6170 @defun ewoc-buffer ewoc
6171 This returns the buffer where @var{ewoc} maintains its text.
6172 @end defun
6173
6174 @defun ewoc-get-hf ewoc
6175 This returns a cons cell @code{(@var{header} . @var{footer})}
6176 made from @var{ewoc}'s header and footer.
6177 @end defun
6178
6179 @defun ewoc-set-hf ewoc header footer
6180 This sets the header and footer of @var{ewoc} to the strings
6181 @var{header} and @var{footer}, respectively.
6182 @end defun
6183
6184 @defun ewoc-enter-first ewoc data
6185 @defunx ewoc-enter-last ewoc data
6186 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, putting it, respectively,
6187 at the beginning or end of @var{ewoc}'s chain of nodes.
6188 @end defun
6189
6190 @defun ewoc-enter-before ewoc node data
6191 @defunx ewoc-enter-after ewoc node data
6192 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, adding it to
6193 @var{ewoc} before or after @var{node}, respectively.
6194 @end defun
6195
6196 @defun ewoc-prev ewoc node
6197 @defunx ewoc-next ewoc node
6198 These return, respectively, the previous node and the next node of @var{node}
6199 in @var{ewoc}.
6200 @end defun
6201
6202 @defun ewoc-nth ewoc n
6203 This returns the node in @var{ewoc} found at zero-based index @var{n}.
6204 A negative @var{n} means count from the end. @code{ewoc-nth} returns
6205 @code{nil} if @var{n} is out of range.
6206 @end defun
6207
6208 @defun ewoc-data node
6209 This extracts the data encapsulated by @var{node} and returns it.
6210 @end defun
6211
6212 @defun ewoc-set-data node data
6213 This sets the data encapsulated by @var{node} to @var{data}.
6214 @end defun
6215
6216 @defun ewoc-locate ewoc &optional pos guess
6217 This determines the node in @var{ewoc} which contains point (or
6218 @var{pos} if specified), and returns that node. If @var{ewoc} has no
6219 nodes, it returns @code{nil}. If @var{pos} is before the first node,
6220 it returns the first node; if @var{pos} is after the last node, it returns
6221 the last node. The optional third arg @var{guess}
6222 should be a node that is likely to be near @var{pos}; this doesn't
6223 alter the result, but makes the function run faster.
6224 @end defun
6225
6226 @defun ewoc-location node
6227 This returns the start position of @var{node}.
6228 @end defun
6229
6230 @defun ewoc-goto-prev ewoc arg
6231 @defunx ewoc-goto-next ewoc arg
6232 These move point to the previous or next, respectively, @var{arg}th node
6233 in @var{ewoc}. @code{ewoc-goto-prev} does not move if it is already at
6234 the first node or if @var{ewoc} is empty, whereas @code{ewoc-goto-next}
6235 moves past the last node, returning @code{nil}. Excepting this special
6236 case, these functions return the node moved to.
6237 @end defun
6238
6239 @defun ewoc-goto-node ewoc node
6240 This moves point to the start of @var{node} in @var{ewoc}.
6241 @end defun
6242
6243 @defun ewoc-refresh ewoc
6244 This function regenerates the text of @var{ewoc}. It works by
6245 deleting the text between the header and the footer, i.e., all the
6246 data elements' representations, and then calling the pretty-printer
6247 function for each node, one by one, in order.
6248 @end defun
6249
6250 @defun ewoc-invalidate ewoc &rest nodes
6251 This is similar to @code{ewoc-refresh}, except that only @var{nodes} in
6252 @var{ewoc} are updated instead of the entire set.
6253 @end defun
6254
6255 @defun ewoc-delete ewoc &rest nodes
6256 This deletes each node in @var{nodes} from @var{ewoc}.
6257 @end defun
6258
6259 @defun ewoc-filter ewoc predicate &rest args
6260 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6261 deletes those nodes for which @var{predicate} returns @code{nil}.
6262 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6263 @end defun
6264
6265 @defun ewoc-collect ewoc predicate &rest args
6266 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc}
6267 and returns a list of those elements for which @var{predicate}
6268 returns non-@code{nil}. The elements in the list are ordered
6269 as in the buffer. Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6270 @end defun
6271
6272 @defun ewoc-map map-function ewoc &rest args
6273 This calls @var{map-function} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6274 updates those nodes for which @var{map-function} returns non-@code{nil}.
6275 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{map-function}.
6276 @end defun
6277
6278 @node Abstract Display Example
6279 @subsection Abstract Display Example
6280
6281 Here is a simple example using functions of the ewoc package to
6282 implement a @dfn{color components} display, an area in a buffer that
6283 represents a vector of three integers (itself representing a 24-bit RGB
6284 value) in various ways.
6285
6286 @example
6287 (setq colorcomp-ewoc nil
6288 colorcomp-data nil
6289 colorcomp-mode-map nil
6290 colorcomp-labels ["Red" "Green" "Blue"])
6291
6292 (defun colorcomp-pp (data)
6293 (if data
6294 (let ((comp (aref colorcomp-data data)))
6295 (insert (aref colorcomp-labels data) "\t: #x"
6296 (format "%02X" comp) " "
6297 (make-string (ash comp -2) ?#) "\n"))
6298 (let ((cstr (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6299 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6300 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6301 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6302 (samp " (sample text) "))
6303 (insert "Color\t: "
6304 (propertize samp 'face
6305 `(foreground-color . ,cstr))
6306 (propertize samp 'face
6307 `(background-color . ,cstr))
6308 "\n"))))
6309
6310 (defun colorcomp (color)
6311 "Allow fiddling with COLOR in a new buffer.
6312 The buffer is in Color Components mode."
6313 (interactive "sColor (name or #RGB or #RRGGBB): ")
6314 (when (string= "" color)
6315 (setq color "green"))
6316 (unless (color-values color)
6317 (error "No such color: %S" color))
6318 (switch-to-buffer
6319 (generate-new-buffer (format "originally: %s" color)))
6320 (kill-all-local-variables)
6321 (setq major-mode 'colorcomp-mode
6322 mode-name "Color Components")
6323 (use-local-map colorcomp-mode-map)
6324 (erase-buffer)
6325 (buffer-disable-undo)
6326 (let ((data (apply 'vector (mapcar (lambda (n) (ash n -8))
6327 (color-values color))))
6328 (ewoc (ewoc-create 'colorcomp-pp
6329 "\nColor Components\n\n"
6330 (substitute-command-keys
6331 "\n\\@{colorcomp-mode-map@}"))))
6332 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-data) data)
6333 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-ewoc) ewoc)
6334 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 0)
6335 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 1)
6336 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 2)
6337 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc nil)))
6338 @end example
6339
6340 @cindex controller part, model/view/controller
6341 This example can be extended to be a color selection widget (in
6342 other words, the ``controller'' part of the ``model--view--controller''
6343 design paradigm) by defining commands to modify @code{colorcomp-data}
6344 and to finish the selection process, and a keymap to tie it all
6345 together conveniently.
6346
6347 @smallexample
6348 (defun colorcomp-mod (index limit delta)
6349 (let ((cur (aref colorcomp-data index)))
6350 (unless (= limit cur)
6351 (aset colorcomp-data index (+ cur delta)))
6352 (ewoc-invalidate
6353 colorcomp-ewoc
6354 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc index)
6355 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc -1))))
6356
6357 (defun colorcomp-R-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 255 1))
6358 (defun colorcomp-G-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 255 1))
6359 (defun colorcomp-B-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 255 1))
6360 (defun colorcomp-R-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 0 -1))
6361 (defun colorcomp-G-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 0 -1))
6362 (defun colorcomp-B-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 0 -1))
6363
6364 (defun colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit ()
6365 "Copy the color components into the kill ring and kill the buffer.
6366 The string is formatted #RRGGBB (hash followed by six hex digits)."
6367 (interactive)
6368 (kill-new (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6369 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6370 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6371 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6372 (kill-buffer nil))
6373
6374 (setq colorcomp-mode-map
6375 (let ((m (make-sparse-keymap)))
6376 (suppress-keymap m)
6377 (define-key m "i" 'colorcomp-R-less)
6378 (define-key m "o" 'colorcomp-R-more)
6379 (define-key m "k" 'colorcomp-G-less)
6380 (define-key m "l" 'colorcomp-G-more)
6381 (define-key m "," 'colorcomp-B-less)
6382 (define-key m "." 'colorcomp-B-more)
6383 (define-key m " " 'colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit)
6384 m))
6385 @end smallexample
6386
6387 Note that we never modify the data in each node, which is fixed when the
6388 ewoc is created to be either @code{nil} or an index into the vector
6389 @code{colorcomp-data}, the actual color components.
6390
6391 @node Blinking
6392 @section Blinking Parentheses
6393 @cindex parenthesis matching
6394 @cindex blinking parentheses
6395 @cindex balancing parentheses
6396
6397 This section describes the mechanism by which Emacs shows a matching
6398 open parenthesis when the user inserts a close parenthesis.
6399
6400 @defvar blink-paren-function
6401 The value of this variable should be a function (of no arguments) to
6402 be called whenever a character with close parenthesis syntax is inserted.
6403 The value of @code{blink-paren-function} may be @code{nil}, in which
6404 case nothing is done.
6405 @end defvar
6406
6407 @defopt blink-matching-paren
6408 If this variable is @code{nil}, then @code{blink-matching-open} does
6409 nothing.
6410 @end defopt
6411
6412 @defopt blink-matching-paren-distance
6413 This variable specifies the maximum distance to scan for a matching
6414 parenthesis before giving up.
6415 @end defopt
6416
6417 @defopt blink-matching-delay
6418 This variable specifies the number of seconds to keep indicating the
6419 matching parenthesis. A fraction of a second often gives good
6420 results, but the default is 1, which works on all systems.
6421 @end defopt
6422
6423 @deffn Command blink-matching-open
6424 This function is the default value of @code{blink-paren-function}. It
6425 assumes that point follows a character with close parenthesis syntax
6426 and applies the appropriate effect momentarily to the matching opening
6427 character. If that character is not already on the screen, it
6428 displays the character's context in the echo area. To avoid long
6429 delays, this function does not search farther than
6430 @code{blink-matching-paren-distance} characters.
6431
6432 Here is an example of calling this function explicitly.
6433
6434 @smallexample
6435 @group
6436 (defun interactive-blink-matching-open ()
6437 "Indicate momentarily the start of parenthesized sexp before point."
6438 (interactive)
6439 @end group
6440 @group
6441 (let ((blink-matching-paren-distance
6442 (buffer-size))
6443 (blink-matching-paren t))
6444 (blink-matching-open)))
6445 @end group
6446 @end smallexample
6447 @end deffn
6448
6449 @node Character Display
6450 @section Character Display
6451
6452 This section describes how characters are actually displayed by
6453 Emacs. Typically, a character is displayed as a @dfn{glyph} (a
6454 graphical symbol which occupies one character position on the screen),
6455 whose appearance corresponds to the character itself. For example,
6456 the character @samp{a} (character code 97) is displayed as @samp{a}.
6457 Some characters, however, are displayed specially. For example, the
6458 formfeed character (character code 12) is usually displayed as a
6459 sequence of two glyphs, @samp{^L}, while the newline character
6460 (character code 10) starts a new screen line.
6461
6462 You can modify how each character is displayed by defining a
6463 @dfn{display table}, which maps each character code into a sequence of
6464 glyphs. @xref{Display Tables}.
6465
6466 @menu
6467 * Usual Display:: The usual conventions for displaying characters.
6468 * Display Tables:: What a display table consists of.
6469 * Active Display Table:: How Emacs selects a display table to use.
6470 * Glyphs:: How to define a glyph, and what glyphs mean.
6471 * Glyphless Chars:: How glyphless characters are drawn.
6472 @end menu
6473
6474 @node Usual Display
6475 @subsection Usual Display Conventions
6476
6477 Here are the conventions for displaying each character code (in the
6478 absence of a display table, which can override these
6479 @iftex
6480 conventions).
6481 @end iftex
6482 @ifnottex
6483 conventions; @pxref{Display Tables}).
6484 @end ifnottex
6485
6486 @cindex printable ASCII characters
6487 @itemize @bullet
6488 @item
6489 The @dfn{printable @acronym{ASCII} characters}, character codes 32
6490 through 126 (consisting of numerals, English letters, and symbols like
6491 @samp{#}) are displayed literally.
6492
6493 @item
6494 The tab character (character code 9) displays as whitespace stretching
6495 up to the next tab stop column. @xref{Text Display,,, emacs, The GNU
6496 Emacs Manual}. The variable @code{tab-width} controls the number of
6497 spaces per tab stop (see below).
6498
6499 @item
6500 The newline character (character code 10) has a special effect: it
6501 ends the preceding line and starts a new line.
6502
6503 @cindex ASCII control characters
6504 @item
6505 The non-printable @dfn{@acronym{ASCII} control characters}---character
6506 codes 0 through 31, as well as the @key{DEL} character (character code
6507 127)---display in one of two ways according to the variable
6508 @code{ctl-arrow}. If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default),
6509 these characters are displayed as sequences of two glyphs, where the
6510 first glyph is @samp{^} (a display table can specify a glyph to use
6511 instead of @samp{^}); e.g., the @key{DEL} character is displayed as
6512 @samp{^?}.
6513
6514 If @code{ctl-arrow} is @code{nil}, these characters are displayed as
6515 octal escapes (see below).
6516
6517 This rule also applies to carriage return (character code 13), if that
6518 character appears in the buffer. But carriage returns usually do not
6519 appear in buffer text; they are eliminated as part of end-of-line
6520 conversion (@pxref{Coding System Basics}).
6521
6522 @cindex octal escapes
6523 @item
6524 @dfn{Raw bytes} are non-@acronym{ASCII} characters with codes 128
6525 through 255 (@pxref{Text Representations}). These characters display
6526 as @dfn{octal escapes}: sequences of four glyphs, where the first
6527 glyph is the @acronym{ASCII} code for @samp{\}, and the others are
6528 digit characters representing the character code in octal. (A display
6529 table can specify a glyph to use instead of @samp{\}.)
6530
6531 @item
6532 Each non-@acronym{ASCII} character with code above 255 is displayed
6533 literally, if the terminal supports it. If the terminal does not
6534 support it, the character is said to be @dfn{glyphless}, and it is
6535 usually displayed using a placeholder glyph. For example, if a
6536 graphical terminal has no font for a character, Emacs usually displays
6537 a box containing the character code in hexadecimal. @xref{Glyphless
6538 Chars}.
6539 @end itemize
6540
6541 The above display conventions apply even when there is a display
6542 table, for any character whose entry in the active display table is
6543 @code{nil}. Thus, when you set up a display table, you need only
6544 specify the characters for which you want special behavior.
6545
6546 The following variables affect how certain characters are displayed
6547 on the screen. Since they change the number of columns the characters
6548 occupy, they also affect the indentation functions. They also affect
6549 how the mode line is displayed; if you want to force redisplay of the
6550 mode line using the new values, call the function
6551 @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6552
6553 @defopt ctl-arrow
6554 @cindex control characters in display
6555 This buffer-local variable controls how control characters are
6556 displayed. If it is non-@code{nil}, they are displayed as a caret
6557 followed by the character: @samp{^A}. If it is @code{nil}, they are
6558 displayed as octal escapes: a backslash followed by three octal
6559 digits, as in @samp{\001}.
6560 @end defopt
6561
6562 @defopt tab-width
6563 The value of this buffer-local variable is the spacing between tab
6564 stops used for displaying tab characters in Emacs buffers. The value
6565 is in units of columns, and the default is 8. Note that this feature
6566 is completely independent of the user-settable tab stops used by the
6567 command @code{tab-to-tab-stop}. @xref{Indent Tabs}.
6568 @end defopt
6569
6570 @node Display Tables
6571 @subsection Display Tables
6572
6573 @cindex display table
6574 A display table is a special-purpose char-table
6575 (@pxref{Char-Tables}), with @code{display-table} as its subtype, which
6576 is used to override the usual character display conventions. This
6577 section describes how to make, inspect, and assign elements to a
6578 display table object.
6579
6580 @defun make-display-table
6581 This creates and returns a display table. The table initially has
6582 @code{nil} in all elements.
6583 @end defun
6584
6585 The ordinary elements of the display table are indexed by character
6586 codes; the element at index @var{c} says how to display the character
6587 code @var{c}. The value should be @code{nil} (which means to display
6588 the character @var{c} according to the usual display conventions;
6589 @pxref{Usual Display}), or a vector of glyph codes (which means to
6590 display the character @var{c} as those glyphs; @pxref{Glyphs}).
6591
6592 @strong{Warning:} if you use the display table to change the display
6593 of newline characters, the whole buffer will be displayed as one long
6594 line.
6595
6596 The display table also has six @dfn{extra slots} which serve special
6597 purposes. Here is a table of their meanings; @code{nil} in any slot
6598 means to use the default for that slot, as stated below.
6599
6600 @table @asis
6601 @item 0
6602 The glyph for the end of a truncated screen line (the default for this
6603 is @samp{$}). @xref{Glyphs}. On graphical terminals, Emacs uses
6604 arrows in the fringes to indicate truncation, so the display table has
6605 no effect.
6606
6607 @item 1
6608 The glyph for the end of a continued line (the default is @samp{\}).
6609 On graphical terminals, Emacs uses curved arrows in the fringes to
6610 indicate continuation, so the display table has no effect.
6611
6612 @item 2
6613 The glyph for indicating a character displayed as an octal character
6614 code (the default is @samp{\}).
6615
6616 @item 3
6617 The glyph for indicating a control character (the default is @samp{^}).
6618
6619 @item 4
6620 A vector of glyphs for indicating the presence of invisible lines (the
6621 default is @samp{...}). @xref{Selective Display}.
6622
6623 @item 5
6624 The glyph used to draw the border between side-by-side windows (the
6625 default is @samp{|}). @xref{Splitting Windows}. This takes effect only
6626 when there are no scroll bars; if scroll bars are supported and in use,
6627 a scroll bar separates the two windows.
6628 @end table
6629
6630 For example, here is how to construct a display table that mimics
6631 the effect of setting @code{ctl-arrow} to a non-@code{nil} value
6632 (@pxref{Glyphs}, for the function @code{make-glyph-code}):
6633
6634 @example
6635 (setq disptab (make-display-table))
6636 (dotimes (i 32)
6637 (or (= i ?\t)
6638 (= i ?\n)
6639 (aset disptab i
6640 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6641 (make-glyph-code (+ i 64) 'escape-glyph)))))
6642 (aset disptab 127
6643 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6644 (make-glyph-code ?? 'escape-glyph)))))
6645 @end example
6646
6647 @defun display-table-slot display-table slot
6648 This function returns the value of the extra slot @var{slot} of
6649 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6650 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6651 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6652 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6653 @end defun
6654
6655 @defun set-display-table-slot display-table slot value
6656 This function stores @var{value} in the extra slot @var{slot} of
6657 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6658 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6659 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6660 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6661 @end defun
6662
6663 @defun describe-display-table display-table
6664 This function displays a description of the display table
6665 @var{display-table} in a help buffer.
6666 @end defun
6667
6668 @deffn Command describe-current-display-table
6669 This command displays a description of the current display table in a
6670 help buffer.
6671 @end deffn
6672
6673 @node Active Display Table
6674 @subsection Active Display Table
6675 @cindex active display table
6676
6677 Each window can specify a display table, and so can each buffer.
6678 The window's display table, if there is one, takes precedence over the
6679 buffer's display table. If neither exists, Emacs tries to use the
6680 standard display table; if that is @code{nil}, Emacs uses the usual
6681 character display conventions (@pxref{Usual Display}).
6682
6683 Note that display tables affect how the mode line is displayed, so
6684 if you want to force redisplay of the mode line using a new display
6685 table, call @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6686
6687 @defun window-display-table &optional window
6688 This function returns @var{window}'s display table, or @code{nil} if
6689 there is none. The default for @var{window} is the selected window.
6690 @end defun
6691
6692 @defun set-window-display-table window table
6693 This function sets the display table of @var{window} to @var{table}.
6694 The argument @var{table} should be either a display table or
6695 @code{nil}.
6696 @end defun
6697
6698 @defvar buffer-display-table
6699 This variable is automatically buffer-local in all buffers; its value
6700 specifies the buffer's display table. If it is @code{nil}, there is
6701 no buffer display table.
6702 @end defvar
6703
6704 @defvar standard-display-table
6705 The value of this variable is the standard display table, which is
6706 used when Emacs is displaying a buffer in a window with neither a
6707 window display table nor a buffer display table defined, or when Emacs
6708 is outputting text to the standard output or error streams. Although its
6709 default is typically @code{nil}, in an interactive session if the
6710 terminal cannot display curved quotes, its default maps curved quotes
6711 to ASCII approximations. @xref{Keys in Documentation}.
6712 @end defvar
6713
6714 The @file{disp-table} library defines several functions for changing
6715 the standard display table.
6716
6717 @node Glyphs
6718 @subsection Glyphs
6719 @cindex glyph
6720
6721 @cindex glyph code
6722 A @dfn{glyph} is a graphical symbol which occupies a single
6723 character position on the screen. Each glyph is represented in Lisp
6724 as a @dfn{glyph code}, which specifies a character and optionally a
6725 face to display it in (@pxref{Faces}). The main use of glyph codes is
6726 as the entries of display tables (@pxref{Display Tables}). The
6727 following functions are used to manipulate glyph codes:
6728
6729 @defun make-glyph-code char &optional face
6730 This function returns a glyph code representing char @var{char} with
6731 face @var{face}. If @var{face} is omitted or @code{nil}, the glyph
6732 uses the default face; in that case, the glyph code is an integer. If
6733 @var{face} is non-@code{nil}, the glyph code is not necessarily an
6734 integer object.
6735 @end defun
6736
6737 @defun glyph-char glyph
6738 This function returns the character of glyph code @var{glyph}.
6739 @end defun
6740
6741 @defun glyph-face glyph
6742 This function returns face of glyph code @var{glyph}, or @code{nil} if
6743 @var{glyph} uses the default face.
6744 @end defun
6745
6746 @ifnottex
6747 You can set up a @dfn{glyph table} to change how glyph codes are
6748 actually displayed on text terminals. This feature is semi-obsolete;
6749 use @code{glyphless-char-display} instead (@pxref{Glyphless Chars}).
6750
6751 @defvar glyph-table
6752 The value of this variable, if non-@code{nil}, is the current glyph
6753 table. It takes effect only on character terminals; on graphical
6754 displays, all glyphs are displayed literally. The glyph table should
6755 be a vector whose @var{g}th element specifies how to display glyph
6756 code @var{g}, where @var{g} is the glyph code for a glyph whose face
6757 is unspecified. Each element should be one of the following:
6758
6759 @table @asis
6760 @item @code{nil}
6761 Display this glyph literally.
6762
6763 @item a string
6764 Display this glyph by sending the specified string to the terminal.
6765
6766 @item a glyph code
6767 Display the specified glyph code instead.
6768 @end table
6769
6770 Any integer glyph code greater than or equal to the length of the
6771 glyph table is displayed literally.
6772 @end defvar
6773 @end ifnottex
6774
6775 @node Glyphless Chars
6776 @subsection Glyphless Character Display
6777 @cindex glyphless characters
6778
6779 @dfn{Glyphless characters} are characters which are displayed in a
6780 special way, e.g., as a box containing a hexadecimal code, instead of
6781 being displayed literally. These include characters which are
6782 explicitly defined to be glyphless, as well as characters for which
6783 there is no available font (on a graphical display), and characters
6784 which cannot be encoded by the terminal's coding system (on a text
6785 terminal).
6786
6787 @defvar glyphless-char-display
6788 The value of this variable is a char-table which defines glyphless
6789 characters and how they are displayed. Each entry must be one of the
6790 following display methods:
6791
6792 @table @asis
6793 @item @code{nil}
6794 Display the character in the usual way.
6795
6796 @item @code{zero-width}
6797 Don't display the character.
6798
6799 @item @code{thin-space}
6800 Display a thin space, 1-pixel wide on graphical displays, or
6801 1-character wide on text terminals.
6802
6803 @item @code{empty-box}
6804 Display an empty box.
6805
6806 @item @code{hex-code}
6807 Display a box containing the Unicode codepoint of the character, in
6808 hexadecimal notation.
6809
6810 @item an @acronym{ASCII} string
6811 Display a box containing that string. The string should contain at
6812 most 6 @acronym{ASCII} characters.
6813
6814 @item a cons cell @code{(@var{graphical} . @var{text})}
6815 Display with @var{graphical} on graphical displays, and with
6816 @var{text} on text terminals. Both @var{graphical} and @var{text}
6817 must be one of the display methods described above.
6818 @end table
6819
6820 @noindent
6821 The @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, @code{hex-code}, and
6822 @acronym{ASCII} string display methods are drawn with the
6823 @code{glyphless-char} face. On text terminals, a box is emulated by
6824 square brackets, @samp{[]}.
6825
6826 The char-table has one extra slot, which determines how to display any
6827 character that cannot be displayed with any available font, or cannot
6828 be encoded by the terminal's coding system. Its value should be one
6829 of the above display methods, except @code{zero-width} or a cons cell.
6830
6831 If a character has a non-@code{nil} entry in an active display table,
6832 the display table takes effect; in this case, Emacs does not consult
6833 @code{glyphless-char-display} at all.
6834 @end defvar
6835
6836 @defopt glyphless-char-display-control
6837 This user option provides a convenient way to set
6838 @code{glyphless-char-display} for groups of similar characters. Do
6839 not set its value directly from Lisp code; the value takes effect only
6840 via a custom @code{:set} function (@pxref{Variable Definitions}),
6841 which updates @code{glyphless-char-display}.
6842
6843 Its value should be an alist of elements @code{(@var{group}
6844 . @var{method})}, where @var{group} is a symbol specifying a group of
6845 characters, and @var{method} is a symbol specifying how to display
6846 them.
6847
6848 @var{group} should be one of the following:
6849
6850 @table @code
6851 @item c0-control
6852 @acronym{ASCII} control characters @code{U+0000} to @code{U+001F},
6853 excluding the newline and tab characters (normally displayed as escape
6854 sequences like @samp{^A}; @pxref{Text Display,, How Text Is Displayed,
6855 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
6856
6857 @item c1-control
6858 Non-@acronym{ASCII}, non-printing characters @code{U+0080} to
6859 @code{U+009F} (normally displayed as octal escape sequences like
6860 @samp{\230}).
6861
6862 @item format-control
6863 Characters of Unicode General Category [Cf], such as @samp{U+200E}
6864 (Left-to-Right Mark), but excluding characters that have graphic
6865 images, such as @samp{U+00AD} (Soft Hyphen).
6866
6867 @item no-font
6868 Characters for there is no suitable font, or which cannot be encoded
6869 by the terminal's coding system.
6870 @end table
6871
6872 @c FIXME: this can also be 'acronym', but that's not currently
6873 @c completely implemented; it applies only to the format-control
6874 @c group, and only works if the acronym is in 'char-acronym-table'.
6875 The @var{method} symbol should be one of @code{zero-width},
6876 @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, or @code{hex-code}. These have
6877 the same meanings as in @code{glyphless-char-display}, above.
6878 @end defopt
6879
6880 @node Beeping
6881 @section Beeping
6882 @cindex bell
6883
6884 This section describes how to make Emacs ring the bell (or blink the
6885 screen) to attract the user's attention. Be conservative about how
6886 often you do this; frequent bells can become irritating. Also be
6887 careful not to use just beeping when signaling an error is more
6888 appropriate (@pxref{Errors}).
6889
6890 @defun ding &optional do-not-terminate
6891 @cindex keyboard macro termination
6892 This function beeps, or flashes the screen (see @code{visible-bell} below).
6893 It also terminates any keyboard macro currently executing unless
6894 @var{do-not-terminate} is non-@code{nil}.
6895 @end defun
6896
6897 @defun beep &optional do-not-terminate
6898 This is a synonym for @code{ding}.
6899 @end defun
6900
6901 @defopt visible-bell
6902 This variable determines whether Emacs should flash the screen to
6903 represent a bell. Non-@code{nil} means yes, @code{nil} means no.
6904 This is effective on graphical displays, and on text terminals
6905 provided the terminal's Termcap entry defines the visible bell
6906 capability (@samp{vb}).
6907 @end defopt
6908
6909 @defopt ring-bell-function
6910 If this is non-@code{nil}, it specifies how Emacs should ring the
6911 bell. Its value should be a function of no arguments. If this is
6912 non-@code{nil}, it takes precedence over the @code{visible-bell}
6913 variable.
6914 @end defopt
6915
6916 @node Window Systems
6917 @section Window Systems
6918
6919 Emacs works with several window systems, most notably the X Window
6920 System. Both Emacs and X use the term ``window'', but use it
6921 differently. An Emacs frame is a single window as far as X is
6922 concerned; the individual Emacs windows are not known to X at all.
6923
6924 @defvar window-system
6925 This terminal-local variable tells Lisp programs what window system
6926 Emacs is using for displaying the frame. The possible values are
6927
6928 @table @code
6929 @item x
6930 @cindex X Window System
6931 Emacs is displaying the frame using X.
6932 @item w32
6933 Emacs is displaying the frame using native MS-Windows GUI.
6934 @item ns
6935 Emacs is displaying the frame using the Nextstep interface (used on
6936 GNUstep and Mac OS X).
6937 @item pc
6938 Emacs is displaying the frame using MS-DOS direct screen writes.
6939 @item nil
6940 Emacs is displaying the frame on a character-based terminal.
6941 @end table
6942 @end defvar
6943
6944 @defvar initial-window-system
6945 This variable holds the value of @code{window-system} used for the
6946 first frame created by Emacs during startup. (When Emacs is invoked
6947 with the @option{--daemon} option, it does not create any initial
6948 frames, so @code{initial-window-system} is @code{nil}, except on
6949 MS-Windows, where it is still @code{w32}. @xref{Initial Options,
6950 daemon,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
6951 @end defvar
6952
6953 @defun window-system &optional frame
6954 This function returns a symbol whose name tells what window system is
6955 used for displaying @var{frame} (which defaults to the currently
6956 selected frame). The list of possible symbols it returns is the same
6957 one documented for the variable @code{window-system} above.
6958 @end defun
6959
6960 Do @emph{not} use @code{window-system} and
6961 @code{initial-window-system} as predicates or boolean flag variables,
6962 if you want to write code that works differently on text terminals and
6963 graphic displays. That is because @code{window-system} is not a good
6964 indicator of Emacs capabilities on a given display type. Instead, use
6965 @code{display-graphic-p} or any of the other @code{display-*-p}
6966 predicates described in @ref{Display Feature Testing}.
6967
6968 @node Bidirectional Display
6969 @section Bidirectional Display
6970 @cindex bidirectional display
6971 @cindex right-to-left text
6972
6973 Emacs can display text written in scripts, such as Arabic, Farsi,
6974 and Hebrew, whose natural ordering for horizontal text display runs
6975 from right to left. Furthermore, segments of Latin script and digits
6976 embedded in right-to-left text are displayed left-to-right, while
6977 segments of right-to-left script embedded in left-to-right text
6978 (e.g., Arabic or Hebrew text in comments or strings in a program
6979 source file) are appropriately displayed right-to-left. We call such
6980 mixtures of left-to-right and right-to-left text @dfn{bidirectional
6981 text}. This section describes the facilities and options for editing
6982 and displaying bidirectional text.
6983
6984 @cindex logical order
6985 @cindex reading order
6986 @cindex visual order
6987 @cindex unicode bidirectional algorithm
6988 @cindex UBA
6989 @cindex bidirectional reordering
6990 @cindex reordering, of bidirectional text
6991 Text is stored in Emacs buffers and strings in @dfn{logical} (or
6992 @dfn{reading}) order, i.e., the order in which a human would read
6993 each character. In right-to-left and bidirectional text, the order in
6994 which characters are displayed on the screen (called @dfn{visual
6995 order}) is not the same as logical order; the characters' screen
6996 positions do not increase monotonically with string or buffer
6997 position. In performing this @dfn{bidirectional reordering}, Emacs
6998 follows the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm (a.k.a.@: @acronym{UBA}),
6999 which is described in Annex #9 of the Unicode standard
7000 (@url{http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr9/}). Emacs provides a ``Full
7001 Bidirectionality'' class implementation of the @acronym{UBA},
7002 consistent with the requirements of the Unicode Standard v8.0.
7003
7004 @defvar bidi-display-reordering
7005 If the value of this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil} (the
7006 default), Emacs performs bidirectional reordering for display. The
7007 reordering affects buffer text, as well as display strings and overlay
7008 strings from text and overlay properties in the buffer (@pxref{Overlay
7009 Properties}, and @pxref{Display Property}). If the value is
7010 @code{nil}, Emacs does not perform bidirectional reordering in the
7011 buffer.
7012
7013 The default value of @code{bidi-display-reordering} controls the
7014 reordering of strings which are not directly supplied by a buffer,
7015 including the text displayed in mode lines (@pxref{Mode Line Format})
7016 and header lines (@pxref{Header Lines}).
7017 @end defvar
7018
7019 @cindex unibyte buffers, and bidi reordering
7020 Emacs never reorders the text of a unibyte buffer, even if
7021 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is non-@code{nil} in the buffer. This
7022 is because unibyte buffers contain raw bytes, not characters, and thus
7023 lack the directionality properties required for reordering.
7024 Therefore, to test whether text in a buffer will be reordered for
7025 display, it is not enough to test the value of
7026 @code{bidi-display-reordering} alone. The correct test is this:
7027
7028 @example
7029 (if (and enable-multibyte-characters
7030 bidi-display-reordering)
7031 ;; Buffer is being reordered for display
7032 )
7033 @end example
7034
7035 However, unibyte display and overlay strings @emph{are} reordered if
7036 their parent buffer is reordered. This is because plain-@sc{ascii}
7037 strings are stored by Emacs as unibyte strings. If a unibyte display
7038 or overlay string includes non-@sc{ascii} characters, these characters
7039 are assumed to have left-to-right direction.
7040
7041 @cindex display properties, and bidi reordering of text
7042 Text covered by @code{display} text properties, by overlays with
7043 @code{display} properties whose value is a string, and by any other
7044 properties that replace buffer text, is treated as a single unit when
7045 it is reordered for display. That is, the entire chunk of text
7046 covered by these properties is reordered together. Moreover, the
7047 bidirectional properties of the characters in such a chunk of text are
7048 ignored, and Emacs reorders them as if they were replaced with a
7049 single character @code{U+FFFC}, known as the @dfn{Object Replacement
7050 Character}. This means that placing a display property over a portion
7051 of text may change the way that the surrounding text is reordered for
7052 display. To prevent this unexpected effect, always place such
7053 properties on text whose directionality is identical with text that
7054 surrounds it.
7055
7056 @cindex base direction of a paragraph
7057 Each paragraph of bidirectional text has a @dfn{base direction},
7058 either right-to-left or left-to-right. Left-to-right paragraphs are
7059 displayed beginning at the left margin of the window, and are
7060 truncated or continued when the text reaches the right margin.
7061 Right-to-left paragraphs are displayed beginning at the right margin,
7062 and are continued or truncated at the left margin.
7063
7064 By default, Emacs determines the base direction of each paragraph by
7065 looking at the text at its beginning. The precise method of
7066 determining the base direction is specified by the @acronym{UBA}; in a
7067 nutshell, the first character in a paragraph that has an explicit
7068 directionality determines the base direction of the paragraph.
7069 However, sometimes a buffer may need to force a certain base direction
7070 for its paragraphs. For example, buffers containing program source
7071 code should force all paragraphs to be displayed left-to-right. You
7072 can use following variable to do this:
7073
7074 @defvar bidi-paragraph-direction
7075 If the value of this buffer-local variable is the symbol
7076 @code{right-to-left} or @code{left-to-right}, all paragraphs in the
7077 buffer are assumed to have that specified direction. Any other value
7078 is equivalent to @code{nil} (the default), which means to determine
7079 the base direction of each paragraph from its contents.
7080
7081 @cindex @code{prog-mode}, and @code{bidi-paragraph-direction}
7082 Modes for program source code should set this to @code{left-to-right}.
7083 Prog mode does this by default, so modes derived from Prog mode do not
7084 need to set this explicitly (@pxref{Basic Major Modes}).
7085 @end defvar
7086
7087 @defun current-bidi-paragraph-direction &optional buffer
7088 This function returns the paragraph direction at point in the named
7089 @var{buffer}. The returned value is a symbol, either
7090 @code{left-to-right} or @code{right-to-left}. If @var{buffer} is
7091 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current buffer. If the
7092 buffer-local value of the variable @code{bidi-paragraph-direction} is
7093 non-@code{nil}, the returned value will be identical to that value;
7094 otherwise, the returned value reflects the paragraph direction
7095 determined dynamically by Emacs. For buffers whose value of
7096 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is @code{nil} as well as unibyte
7097 buffers, this function always returns @code{left-to-right}.
7098 @end defun
7099
7100 @cindex visual-order cursor motion
7101 Sometimes there's a need to move point in strict visual order,
7102 either to the left or to the right of its current screen position.
7103 Emacs provides a primitive to do that.
7104
7105 @defun move-point-visually direction
7106 This function moves point of the currently selected window to the
7107 buffer position that appears immediately to the right or to the left
7108 of point on the screen. If @var{direction} is positive, point will
7109 move one screen position to the right, otherwise it will move one
7110 screen position to the left. Note that, depending on the surrounding
7111 bidirectional context, this could potentially move point many buffer
7112 positions away. If invoked at the end of a screen line, the function
7113 moves point to the rightmost or leftmost screen position of the next
7114 or previous screen line, as appropriate for the value of
7115 @var{direction}.
7116
7117 The function returns the new buffer position as its value.
7118 @end defun
7119
7120 @cindex layout on display, and bidirectional text
7121 @cindex jumbled display of bidirectional text
7122 @cindex concatenating bidirectional strings
7123 Bidirectional reordering can have surprising and unpleasant effects
7124 when two strings with bidirectional content are juxtaposed in a
7125 buffer, or otherwise programmatically concatenated into a string of
7126 text. A typical problematic case is when a buffer consists of
7127 sequences of text fields separated by whitespace or punctuation
7128 characters, like Buffer Menu mode or Rmail Summary Mode. Because the
7129 punctuation characters used as separators have @dfn{weak
7130 directionality}, they take on the directionality of surrounding text.
7131 As result, a numeric field that follows a field with bidirectional
7132 content can be displayed @emph{to the left} of the preceding field,
7133 messing up the expected layout. There are several ways to avoid this
7134 problem:
7135
7136 @itemize @minus
7137 @item
7138 Append the special character @code{U+200E}, LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK, or
7139 @acronym{LRM}, to the end of each field that may have bidirectional
7140 content, or prepend it to the beginning of the following field. The
7141 function @code{bidi-string-mark-left-to-right}, described below, comes
7142 in handy for this purpose. (In a right-to-left paragraph, use
7143 @code{U+200F}, RIGHT-TO-LEFT MARK, or @acronym{RLM}, instead.) This
7144 is one of the solutions recommended by the UBA.
7145
7146 @item
7147 Include the tab character in the field separator. The tab character
7148 plays the role of @dfn{segment separator} in bidirectional reordering,
7149 causing the text on either side to be reordered separately.
7150
7151 @cindex @code{space} display spec, and bidirectional text
7152 @item
7153 Separate fields with a @code{display} property or overlay with a
7154 property value of the form @code{(space . PROPS)} (@pxref{Specified
7155 Space}). Emacs treats this display specification as a @dfn{paragraph
7156 separator}, and reorders the text on either side separately.
7157 @end itemize
7158
7159 @defun bidi-string-mark-left-to-right string
7160 This function returns its argument @var{string}, possibly modified,
7161 such that the result can be safely concatenated with another string,
7162 or juxtaposed with another string in a buffer, without disrupting the
7163 relative layout of this string and the next one on display. If the
7164 string returned by this function is displayed as part of a
7165 left-to-right paragraph, it will always appear on display to the left
7166 of the text that follows it. The function works by examining the
7167 characters of its argument, and if any of those characters could cause
7168 reordering on display, the function appends the @acronym{LRM}
7169 character to the string. The appended @acronym{LRM} character is made
7170 invisible by giving it an @code{invisible} text property of @code{t}
7171 (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
7172 @end defun
7173
7174 The reordering algorithm uses the bidirectional properties of the
7175 characters stored as their @code{bidi-class} property
7176 (@pxref{Character Properties}). Lisp programs can change these
7177 properties by calling the @code{put-char-code-property} function.
7178 However, doing this requires a thorough understanding of the
7179 @acronym{UBA}, and is therefore not recommended. Any changes to the
7180 bidirectional properties of a character have global effect: they
7181 affect all Emacs frames and windows.
7182
7183 Similarly, the @code{mirroring} property is used to display the
7184 appropriate mirrored character in the reordered text. Lisp programs
7185 can affect the mirrored display by changing this property. Again, any
7186 such changes affect all of Emacs display.
7187
7188 @cindex overriding bidirectional properties
7189 @cindex directional overrides
7190 @cindex LRO
7191 @cindex RLO
7192 The bidirectional properties of characters can be overridden by
7193 inserting into the text special directional control characters,
7194 LEFT-TO-RIGHT OVERRIDE (@acronym{LRO}) and RIGHT-TO-LEFT OVERRIDE
7195 (@acronym{RLO}). Any characters between a @acronym{RLO} and the
7196 following newline or POP DIRECTIONAL FORMATTING (@acronym{PDF})
7197 control character, whichever comes first, will be displayed as if they
7198 were strong right-to-left characters, i.e.@: they will be reversed on
7199 display. Similarly, any characters between @acronym{LRO} and
7200 @acronym{PDF} or newline will display as if they were strong
7201 left-to-right, and will @emph{not} be reversed even if they are strong
7202 right-to-left characters.
7203
7204 @cindex phishing using directional overrides
7205 @cindex malicious use of directional overrides
7206 These overrides are useful when you want to make some text
7207 unaffected by the reordering algorithm, and instead directly control
7208 the display order. But they can also be used for malicious purposes,
7209 known as @dfn{phishing}. Specifically, a URL on a Web page or a link
7210 in an email message can be manipulated to make its visual appearance
7211 unrecognizable, or similar to some popular benign location, while the
7212 real location, interpreted by a browser in the logical order, is very
7213 different.
7214
7215 Emacs provides a primitive that applications can use to detect
7216 instances of text whose bidirectional properties were overridden so as
7217 to make a left-to-right character display as if it were a
7218 right-to-left character, or vise versa.
7219
7220 @defun bidi-find-overridden-directionality from to &optional object
7221 This function looks at the text of the specified @var{object} between
7222 positions @var{from} (inclusive) and @var{to} (exclusive), and returns
7223 the first position where it finds a strong left-to-right character
7224 whose directional properties were forced to display the character as
7225 right-to-left, or for a strong right-to-left character that was forced
7226 to display as left-to-right. If it finds no such characters in the
7227 specified region of text, it returns @code{nil}.
7228
7229 The optional argument @var{object} specifies which text to search, and
7230 defaults to the current buffer. If @var{object} is non-@code{nil}, it
7231 can be some other buffer, or it can be a string or a window. If it is
7232 a string, the function searches that string. If it is a window, the
7233 function searches the buffer displayed in that window. If a buffer
7234 whose text you want to examine is displayed in some window, we
7235 recommend to specify it by that window, rather than pass the buffer to
7236 the function. This is because telling the function about the window
7237 allows it to correctly account for window-specific overlays, which
7238 might change the result of the function if some text in the buffer is
7239 covered by overlays.
7240 @end defun
7241
7242 @cindex copying bidirectional text, preserve visual order
7243 @cindex visual order, preserve when copying bidirectional text
7244 When text that includes mixed right-to-left and left-to-right
7245 characters and bidirectional controls is copied into a different
7246 location, it can change its visual appearance, and also can affect the
7247 visual appearance of the surrounding text at destination. This is
7248 because reordering of bidirectional text specified by the
7249 @acronym{UBA} has non-trivial context-dependent effects both on the
7250 copied text and on the text at copy destination that will surround it.
7251
7252 Sometimes, a Lisp program may need to preserve the exact visual
7253 appearance of the copied text at destination, and of the text that
7254 surrounds the copy. Lisp programs can use the following function to
7255 achieve that effect.
7256
7257 @defun buffer-substring-with-bidi-context start end &optional no-properties
7258 This function works similar to @code{buffer-substring} (@pxref{Buffer
7259 Contents}), but it prepends and appends to the copied text bidi
7260 directional control characters necessary to preserve the visual
7261 appearance of the text when it is inserted at another place. Optional
7262 argument @var{no-properties}, if non-@code{nil}, means remove the text
7263 properties from the copy of the text.
7264 @end defun